 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| To all our customers Regarding the change of names mentioned in the document, such as Hitachi Electric and Hitachi XX, to Renesas Technology Corp. The semiconductor operations of Mitsubishi Electric and Hitachi were transferred to Renesas Technology Corporation on April 1st 2003. These operations include microcomputer, logic, analog and discrete devices, and memory chips other than DRAMs (flash memory, SRAMs etc.) Accordingly, although Hitachi, Hitachi, Ltd., Hitachi Semiconductors, and other Hitachi brand names are mentioned in the document, these names have in fact all been changed to Renesas Technology Corp. Thank you for your understanding. Except for our corporate trademark, logo and corporate statement, no changes whatsoever have been made to the contents of the document, and these changes do not constitute any alteration to the contents of the document itself. Renesas Technology Home Page: www.renesas.com Renesas Technology Corp. Customer Support Dept. April 1, 2003 w w w . at d sh a et e u. 4 om c Renesas Technology Corp. www..com OMC942723054 HITACHI SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER H8/329 SERIES H8/329 HD6473298, HD6433298, HD6413298 H8/328 HD6433288 H8/327 HD6473278, HD6433278, HD6413278 H8/326 HD6433268 HARDWARE MANUAL Preface The H8/329 Series is a series of high-performance single-chip microcomputers having a fast H8/300 CPU core and a set of on-chip supporting functions optimized for embedded control. These include ROM, RAM, two types of timers, a serial communication interface, an A/D converter, I/O ports, and other functions needed in control system configurations, so that compact, high-performance systems can be realized easily. The H8/329 Series includes four chips: the H8/329 with 32K-byte ROM and 1K-byte RAM; the H8/328 with 24K-byte ROM and 1K-byte RAM; the H8/327 with 16K-byte ROM and 512-byte RAM; and the H8/326 with 8K-byte ROM and 256-byte RAM. The H8/329 and H8/327 are available in a masked ROM version, a ZTATTM* (Zero Turn-Around Time) version, and a ROMless version, providing a quick and flexible response to conditions from ramp-up through full-scale volume producion, even for applications with frequently-changing specifications. This manual describes the hardware of the H8/329 Series. Refer to the H8/300 Series Programming Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set. Notes: * ZTAT is a registered trademark of Hitachi, Ltd. Contents Section 1. Overview............................................................................................................... 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Overview............................................................................................................................... Block Diagram...................................................................................................................... Pin Assignments and Functions............................................................................................ 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement...................................................................................................... 1.3.2 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................... 1 5 6 6 8 Section 2. MCU Operating Modes and Address Space ................................................ 15 2.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 2.1.1 Mode Selection ........................................................................................................ 2.1.2 Mode and System Control Registers (MDCR and SYSCR) ................................... System Control Register (SYSCR)--H'FFC4 ...................................................................... Mode Control Register (MDCR)--H'FFC5 ......................................................................... Address Space Maps............................................................................................................. 15 15 16 16 18 19 2.2 2.3 2.4 Section 3. CPU ........................................................................................................................ 23 3.1 3.2 Overview............................................................................................................................... 3.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................... Register Configuration.......................................................................................................... 3.2.1 General Registers..................................................................................................... 3.2.2 Control Registers ..................................................................................................... 3.2.3 Initial Register Values.............................................................................................. Addressing Modes ................................................................................................................ 3.3.1 Addressing Mode..................................................................................................... 3.3.2 How to Calculate Where the Execution Starts ........................................................ Data Formats......................................................................................................................... 3.4.1 Data Formats in General Registers.......................................................................... 3.4.2 Memory Data Formats............................................................................................. Instruction Set ....................................................................................................................... 3.5.1 Data Transfer Instructions ....................................................................................... 3.5.2 Arithmetic Operations ............................................................................................. 3.5.3 Logic Operations ..................................................................................................... 3.5.4 Shift Operations....................................................................................................... 3.5.5 Bit Manipulations .................................................................................................... 3.5.6 Branching Instructions............................................................................................. 3.5.7 System Control Instructions .................................................................................... 23 23 24 24 25 26 27 27 29 33 34 35 36 38 40 41 41 43 47 49 3.3 3.4 3.5 i 3.6 3.7 3.5.8 Block Data Transfer Instruction .............................................................................. CPU States ............................................................................................................................ 3.6.1 Program Execution State ......................................................................................... 3.6.2 Exception-Handling State........................................................................................ 3.6.3 Power-Down State ................................................................................................... Access Timing and Bus Cycle .............................................................................................. 3.7.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM and ROM) ...................................................... 3.7.2 Access to On-Chip Register Field and External Devices ........................................ 50 51 52 52 53 53 53 55 Section 4. Exception Handling............................................................................................ 59 4.1 4.2 Overview............................................................................................................................... Reset ..................................................................................................................................... 4.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 4.2.2 Reset Sequence ........................................................................................................ 4.2.3 Disabling of Interrupts after Reset........................................................................... Interrupts............................................................................................................................... 4.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 4.3.2 Interrupt-Related Registers...................................................................................... 4.3.3 External Interrupts ................................................................................................... 4.3.4 Internal Interrupts .................................................................................................... 4.3.5 Interrupt Handling ................................................................................................... 4.3.6 Interrupt Response Time.......................................................................................... 4.3.7 Precaution ................................................................................................................ Note on Stack Handling........................................................................................................ 59 59 59 59 62 62 62 64 66 67 67 72 72 73 4.3 4.4 Section 5. I/O Ports ................................................................................................................ 75 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 Overview............................................................................................................................... 75 Port 1..................................................................................................................................... 77 Port 2..................................................................................................................................... 80 Port 3..................................................................................................................................... 84 Port 4..................................................................................................................................... 88 Port 5..................................................................................................................................... 96 Port 6..................................................................................................................................... 100 Port 7..................................................................................................................................... 111 Section 6. 16-Bit Free-Running Timer.............................................................................. 113 6.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 113 6.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................... 113 ii 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................... 113 6.1.3 Input and Output Pins .............................................................................................. 115 6.1.4 Register Configuration ............................................................................................ 115 Register Descriptions............................................................................................................ 116 6.2.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC)--H'FF92.................................................................. 116 6.2.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB)--H'FF94....................... 117 6.2.3 Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD)-- H'FF98, H'FF9A, H'FF9C, H'FF9E ......................................................................... 117 6.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)--H'FF90 ................................................. 120 6.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)--H'FF91 ................................................... 122 6.2.6 Timer Control Register (TCR)--H'FF96 ................................................................ 125 6.2.7 Timer Output Compare Control Register (TOCR)--H'FF97.................................. 127 CPU Interface ....................................................................................................................... 128 Operation .............................................................................................................................. 130 6.4.1 FRC Incrementation Timing.................................................................................... 130 6.4.2 Output Compare Timing.......................................................................................... 132 6.4.3 Input Capture Timing .............................................................................................. 133 6.4.4 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF)..................................................................... 136 Interrupts............................................................................................................................... 137 Sample Application............................................................................................................... 137 Application Notes ................................................................................................................. 138 Section 7. 8-Bit Timers ......................................................................................................... 143 7.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 143 7.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................... 143 7.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................... 143 7.1.3 Input and Output Pins .............................................................................................. 144 7.1.4 Register Configuration ............................................................................................ 145 Register Descriptions............................................................................................................ 145 7.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)--H'FFCC (TMR0), H'FFD4 (TMR1)............................... 145 7.2.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA and TCORB)-- H'FFCA and H'FFCB (TMR0), H'FFD2 and H'FFD3 (TMR1) .............................. 146 7.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR)--H'FFC8 (TMR0), H'FFD0 (TMR1) .................... 146 7.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)--H'FFC9 (TMR0), H'FFD1 (TMR1) ....... 149 7.2.5 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)--H'FFC3 ................................................... 151 Operation .............................................................................................................................. 152 7.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing................................................................................. 152 7.3.2 Compare Match Timing........................................................................................... 153 7.2 7.3 iii 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.3.3 External Reset of TCNT .......................................................................................... 155 7.3.4 Setting of TCSR Overflow Flag (OVF) .................................................................. 156 Interrupts............................................................................................................................... 157 Sample Application............................................................................................................... 157 Application Notes ................................................................................................................. 158 Section 8. Serial Communication Interface ..................................................................... 163 8.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 163 8.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................... 163 8.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................... 164 8.1.3 Input and Output Pins .............................................................................................. 164 8.1.4 Register Configuration ............................................................................................ 165 Register Descriptions............................................................................................................ 166 8.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) .................................................................................. 166 8.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)--H'FFDD................................................................ 166 8.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)................................................................................. 166 8.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)--H'FFDB............................................................... 167 8.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)--H'FFD8 .................................................................. 167 8.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR)--H'FFDA ............................................................... 170 8.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)--H'FFDC .................................................................. 174 8.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR)--H'FFD9 ......................................................................... 177 8.2.9 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)--H'FFC3 ................................................... 181 Operation .............................................................................................................................. 182 8.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 182 8.3.2 Asynchronous Mode................................................................................................ 184 8.3.3 Clocked Synchronous Operation ............................................................................. 197 SCI Interrupts........................................................................................................................ 206 Application Notes ................................................................................................................. 206 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 Section 9. A/D Converter ..................................................................................................... 209 9.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 209 9.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................... 209 9.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................... 210 9.1.3 Input Pins................................................................................................................. 211 9.1.4 Register Configuration ............................................................................................ 211 Register Descriptions............................................................................................................ 212 9.2.1 A/D Data Registers (ADDR)--H'FFE0 to H'FFE6................................................. 212 9.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)--H'FFE8 .................................................. 212 9.2 iv 9.3 9.4 9.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)--H'FFEA............................................................... 215 Operation .............................................................................................................................. 215 9.3.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) ........................................................................................ 216 9.3.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1) .......................................................................................... 219 9.3.3 Input Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Time.................................................... 222 9.3.4 External Trigger Input Timing................................................................................. 223 Interrupts............................................................................................................................... 224 Section 10. RAM.......................................................................................................................225 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 Overview............................................................................................................................... 225 Block Diagram...................................................................................................................... 225 RAM Enable Bit (RAME) in System Control Register (SYSCR) ....................................... 225 Operation .............................................................................................................................. 226 10.4.1 Expanded Modes (Modes 1 and 2) .......................................................................... 226 10.4.2 Single-Chip Mode (Mode 3) ................................................................................... 226 Section 11. ROM.......................................................................................................................227 11.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 227 11.1.1 Block Diagram......................................................................................................... 228 11.2 PROM Mode (H8/329, H8/327) ........................................................................................... 228 11.2.1 PROM Mode Setup ................................................................................................. 228 11.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Assignments and Memory Map............................................... 229 11.3 Programming ........................................................................................................................ 232 11.3.1 Writing and Verifying .............................................................................................. 232 11.3.2 Notes on Writing...................................................................................................... 236 11.3.3 Reliability of Written Data ...................................................................................... 236 11.3.4 Erasing of Data ........................................................................................................ 237 11.4 Handling of Windowed Packages......................................................................................... 238 Section 12. Power-Down State..............................................................................................239 12.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 239 12.2 System Control Register: Power-Down Control Bits ........................................................... 240 12.3 Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................... 241 12.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode......................................................................................... 242 12.3.2 Exit from Sleep Mode ............................................................................................. 242 12.4 Software Standby Mode........................................................................................................ 242 12.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode..................................................................... 243 12.4.2 Exit from Software Standby Mode.......................................................................... 243 v 12.4.3 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode ..................................................... 243 12.4.4 Application Note ..................................................................................................... 244 12.5 Hardware Standby Mode ...................................................................................................... 245 12.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode.................................................................... 245 12.5.2 Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode................................................................ 245 12.5.3 Timing Relationships............................................................................................... 246 Section 13. Clock Pulse Generator.......................................................................................247 13.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 247 13.1.1 Block Diagram......................................................................................................... 247 13.2 Oscillator Circuit................................................................................................................... 247 13.3 System Clock Divider........................................................................................................... 250 Section 14. Electrical Specifications....................................................................................251 14.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................................. 251 14.2 Electrical Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 251 14.2.1 DC Characteristics................................................................................................... 251 14.2.2 AC Characteristics................................................................................................... 257 14.2.3 A/D Converter Characteristics................................................................................. 261 14.3 MCU Operational Timing..................................................................................................... 262 14.3.1 Bus Timing .............................................................................................................. 262 14.3.2 Control Signal Timing ............................................................................................. 263 14.3.3 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing ........................................................................ 266 14.3.4 8-Bit Timer Timing.................................................................................................. 267 14.3.5 Serial Communication Interface Timing ................................................................. 268 14.3.6 I/O Port Timing........................................................................................................ 269 Appendices Appendix A. CPU Instruction Set......................................................................................271 A.1 Instruction Set List................................................................................................................ 271 A.2 Operation Code Map............................................................................................................. 278 A.3 Number of States Required for Execution............................................................................ 280 Appendix B. Register Field ................................................................................................. 286 B.1 Register Addresses and Bit Names....................................................................................... 286 B.2 Register Descriptions............................................................................................................ 290 vi Appendix C. Pin States.........................................................................................................317 C.1 Pin States in Each Mode ....................................................................................................... 317 Appendix D. Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................................................ 319 Appendix E. Package Dimensions .................................................................................... 320 vii Section 1. Overview 1.1 Overview The H8/329 Series of single-chip microcomputers features an H8/300 CPU core and a complement of on-chip supporting modules implementing a variety of system functions. The H8/300 CPU is a high-speed processor with an architecture featuring powerful bitmanipulation instructions, ideally suited for realtime control applications. The on-chip supporting modules implement peripheral functions needed in system configurations. These include ROM, RAM, two types of timers (a 16-bit free-running timer and 8-bit timers), a serial communication interface (SCI), an A/D converter, and I/O ports. The H8/329 Series can operate in a single-chip mode or in two expanded modes, depending on the requirements of the application. (The operating mode will be referred to as the MCU mode in this manual.) The entire H8/329 Series is available with masked ROM. The H8/329 and H8/327 are also available in ZTATTM versions* that can be programmed at the user site, and in ROMless versions. Notes: * ZTAT is a registered trademark of Hitachi, Ltd. Table 1-1 lists the features of the H8/329 Series. 1 Table 1-1. Features Item CPU Specification Two-way general register configuration * Eight 16-bit registers, or * Sixteen 8-bit registers High-speed operation * Maximum clock rate: 10MHz * Add/subtract: 0.2s * Multiply/divide: 1.4s Streamlined, concise instruction set * Instruction length: 2 or 4 bytes * Register-register arithmetic and logic operations * MOV instruction for data transfer between registers and memory Instruction set features * Multiply instruction (8 bits x 8 bits) * Divide instruction (16 bits / 8 bits) * Bit-accumulator instructions * Register-indirect specification of bit positions * H8/329: 32k-byte ROM; 1k-byte RAM * H8/328: 24k-byte ROM; 1k-byte RAM * H8/327: 16k-byte ROM; 512-byte RAM * H8/326: 8k-byte ROM; 256-byte RAM * One 16-bit free-running counter (can also count external events) * Two output-compare lines * Four input capture lines (can be buffered) Each channel has * One 8-bit up-counter (can also count external events) * Two time constant registers * Asynchronous or clocked synchronous mode (selectable) * Full duplex: can transmit and receive simultaneously * On-chip baud rate generator Memory 16-bit freerunning timer (1 channel) 8-bit timer (2 channels) Serial communication interface (SCI) (1 channel) 2 Table 1-1. Features (cont.) Item A/D converter Specification * 8-bit resolution * Eight channels: single or scan mode (selectable) * Start of A/D conversion can be externally triggered * Sample-and-hold function * 43 input/output lines (16 of which can drive LEDs) * 8 input-only lines * Four external interrupt lines: NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ2 * 18 on-chip interrupt sources * Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled (mode 1) * Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled (mode 2) * Single-chip mode (mode 3) * Sleep mode * Software standby mode * Hardware standby mode * On-chip oscillator I/O ports Interrupts Operating modes Power-down modes Other features 3 Table 1-1. Features (cont.) Item Series lineup 5-V version H8/329 HD6473298C HD6473298P HD6473298F HD6473298CP HD6433298P HD6433298F HD6433298CP HD6413298P HD6413298F HD6413298CP H8/328 HD6433288P HD6433288F HD6433288CP H8/327 HD6473278C HD6473278P HD6473278F HD6473278CP HD6433278P HD6433278F HD6433278CP HD6413278P HD6413278F HD6413278CP H8/326 HD6433268P HD6433268F HD6433268CP 3-V version HD6473298VC HD6473298VP HD6473298VF HD6473298VCP HD6433298VP HD6433298VF HD6433298VCP HD6413298VP HD6413298VF HD6413298VCP HD6433288VP HD6433288VF HD6433288VCP HD6473278VC HD6473278VP HD6473278VF HD6473278VCP HD6433278VP HD6433278VF HD6433278VCP HD6413278VP HD6413278VF HD6413278VCP HD6433268VP HD6433268VF HD6433268VCP Package 64-pin windowed shrink DIP (DC-64S) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 68-pin PLCC (CP-68) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 68-pin PLCC (CP-68) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 68-pin PLCC (CP-68) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 68-pin PLCC (CP-68) 64-pin windowed shrink DIP (DC-64S) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 68-pin PLCC (CP-68) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 68-pin PLCC (CP-68) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 68-pin PLCC (CP-68) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 68-pin PLCC (CP-68) Masked ROM ROMless Masked ROM PROM Masked ROM ROMless Masked ROM ROM PROM Specification 4 1.2 Block Diagram Figure 1-1 shows a block diagram of the H8/329 Series. XTAL EXTAL Clock pulse generator RES STBY NMI MD0 MD1 VCC VCC VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS CPU H8/300 *1 Address bus Data bus (Low) P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 Data bus (High) PROM *2 (or masked ROM) RAM P4 0 /IRQ 2 /ADTRG P4 1 /IRQ 1 P4 2 /IRQ 0 P4 3 /RD P4 4 /WR P4 5 /AS P4 6 /O P4 7 /WAIT Port 1 P2 0 /A 8 P2 1 /A 9 P2 2 /A10 P2 3 /A11 P2 4 /A12 P2 5 /A13 P2 6 /A14 P2 7 /A15 16-bit freerunning timer Port 2 Serial communication interface Port 3 Port 4 8-bit timer (2 channels) 8-bit A/D converter (8 channels) P30/D0 P31/D1 P32/D2 P33/D3 P34/D4 P35/D5 P36/D6 P37/D7 Port 6 Port 7 Port 5 P6 0 /FTCI/TMCI0 P61 /FTOA P6 2 /FTIA P6 3 /FTIB/TMRI0 P6 4 /FTIC/TMO0 P6 5 /FTID/TMCI1 P6 6 /FTOB/TMRI1 P6 7 /TMO1 P7 0 /AN0 P7 1 /AN1 P7 2 /AN2 P7 3 /AN3 P7 4 /AN4 P7 5 /AN5 P7 6 /AN6 P7 7 /AN7 AVCC AVSS P5 0 /TxD P5 1 /RxD Notes: * 1 CP-68 package only. * 2 PROM is available only in the H8/329 and H8/327. Memory Sizes H8/329 ROM RAM 32k bytes 1k byte H8/328 24k bytes 1k byte H8/327 16k bytes 512 bytes H8/326 8k bytes 256 bytes Figure 1-1. Block Diagram 5 P5 2 /SCK 1.3 Pin Assignments and Functions 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement Figure 1-2 shows the pin arrangement of the DC-64S and DP-64S packages. Figure 1-3 shows the pin arrangement of the FP-64A package. Figure 1-4 shows the pin arrangement of the CP-68 package. P40/ADTRG/IRQ2 P41/IRQ1 P42/IRQ0 P43/RD P44/WR P45/AS P46/O P47/WAIT P50/TxD P51/RxD P52/SCK RES NMI VCC STBY VSS XTAL EXTAL MD1 MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6 P77/AN7 AVCC P60/FTCI/TMCI0 P61/FTOA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 P37/D7 P36/D6 P35/D5 P34/D4 P33/D3 P32/D2 P31/D1 P30/D0 P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 VSS P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13 P26/A14 P27/A15 VCC P67/TMO1 P66/FTOB/TMRI1 P65/FTID/TMCI1 P64/FTIC/TMO0 P63/FTIB/TMRI0 P62/FTIA Figure 1-2. Pin Arrangement (DC-64S and DP-64S, Top View) 6 P40/ADTRG/IRQ2 P47/WAIT P42/IRQ0 P41/IRQ1 P44/WR P43/RD P45/AS P37/D7 P36/D6 P35/D5 P34/D4 P33/D3 P32/D2 P31/D1 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 P50/TxD P51/RxD P52/SCK RES NMI VCC STBY VSS XTAL EXTAL MD1 MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 VSS P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13 P26/A14 P61/FTOA P62/FTIA P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6 P77/AN7 P60/FTCI/TMCI0 P63/FTIB/TMRI0 P64/FTIC/TMO0 P65/FTID/TMCI1 P66/FTOB/TMRI1 Figure 1-3. Pin Arrangement (FP-64A, Top View) P67/TMO1 P27/A15 H049 H8/329 U.M. Fig. 1-3 AVCC 7 VCC P30/D0 P46/O P40/ADTRG/IRQ2 P47/WAIT P42/IRQ0 P41/IRQ1 P44/WR P43/RD P45/AS P37/D7 P36/D6 P35/D5 P34/D4 P33/D3 P32/D2 P31/D1 9 P50/TxD P51/RxD P52/SCK RES NMI VCC STBY VSS VSS XTAL EXTAL MD1 MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 VSS VSS P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13 P26/A14 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 P61/FTOA P62/FTIA P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6 P77/AN7 P60/FTCI/TMCI0 P63/FTIB/TMRI0 P64/FTIC/TMO0 P65/FTID/TMCI1 P66/FTOB/TMRI1 P67/TMO1 Figure 1-4. Pin Arrangement (CP-68, Top View) H049 H8/329 U.M. Fig. 1-4 8 P27/A15 AVCC VSS VCC P30/D0 P46/O VSS 1.3.2 Pin Functions (1) Pin Assignments in Each Operating Mode: Table 1-2 lists the assignments of the pins of the DC-64S, DP-64S, FP-64A, and CP-68 packages in each operating mode. Table 1-2. Pin Assignments in Each Operating Mode (1) Pin No. DC-64S DP-64S -- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 -- 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 FP-64A -- 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 CP-68 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Mode 1 VSS P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 P42/IRQ0 RD WR AS O WAIT P50/TxD P51/RxD P52/SCK RES NMI VCC STBY VSS VSS XTAL EXTAL MD1 MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6 P77/AN7 Expanded modes Mode 2 VSS P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 P42/IRQ0 RD WR AS O WAIT P50/TxD P51/RxD P52/SCK RES NMI VCC STBY VSS VSS XTAL EXTAL MD1 MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6 P77/AN7 Single-chip mode Mode 3 VSS P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 P42/IRQ0 P43 P44 P45 P46/O P47 P50/TxD P51/RxD P52/SCK RES NMI VCC STBY VSS VSS XTAL EXTAL MD1 MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6 P77/AN7 PROM mode VSS NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC VPP EA9 VCC VSS VSS VSS NC NC VSS VSS VSS NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC Notes: 1. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected. 2. For details on PROM mode, refer to 11.2, "PROM Mode." 9 Table 1-2. Pin Assignments in Each Operating Mode (2) Pin No. DC-64S DP-64S 30 31 32 -- 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 -- 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 FP-64A 22 23 24 -- 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 -- 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 CP-68 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Mode 1 AVCC P60/FTCI/TMCI0 P61/FTOA VSS P62/FTIA P63/FTIB/TMRI0 P64/FTIC/TMO0 P65/FTID/TMCI1 P66/FTOB/TMRI1 P67/TMO1 VCC A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 VSS VSS A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Expanded modes Mode 2 AVCC P60/FTCI/TMCI0 P61/FTOA VSS P62/FTIA P63/FTIB/TMRI0 P64/FTIC/TMO0 P65/FTID/TMCI1 P66/FTOB/TMRI1 P67/TMO1 VCC A27/A15 P26/A14 P25/A13 P24/A12 P23/A11 P22/A10 P21/A9 P20/A8 VSS VSS P17/A7 P16/A6 P15/A5 P14/A4 P13/A3 P12/A2 P11/A1 P10/A0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Single-chip mode Mode 3 AVCC P60/FTCI/TMCI0 P61/FTOA VSS P62/FTIA P63/FTIB/TMRI0 P64/FTIC/TMO0 P65/FTID/TMCI1 P66/FTOB/TMRI1 P67/TMO1 VCC P27 P26 P25 P24 P23 P22 P21 P20 VSS VSS P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 PROM mode VCC NC NC VSS NC VCC VCC NC NC NC VCC CE EA14 EA13 EA12 EA11 EA10 OE EA8 VSS VSS EA7 EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 EO0 EO1 EO2 EO3 EO4 EO5 EO6 EO7 Notes: 1. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected. 2. For details on PROM mode, refer to 11.2, "PROM Mode." 10 (2) Pin Functions: Table 1-3 gives a concise description of the function of each pin. Table 1-3. Pin Functions (1) Pin No. Type Power Symbol VCC DC-64S DP-64S FP-64A CP-68 14, 39 6, 31 15, 42 I/O Name and function I Power: Connected to the power supply (+5V). Connect both VCC pins to the system power supply (+5V). I Ground: Connected to ground (0V). Connect all VSS pins to the system power supply (0V). I Crystal: Connected to a crystal oscillator. The crystal frequency should be double the desired system clock frequency. If an external clock is input at the EXTAL pin, a reverse-phase clock should be input at the XTAL pin. I External crystal: Connected to a crystal oscillator or external clock. The frequency of the external clock should be double the desired system clock frequency. See section 13.2, "Oscillator Circuit" for examples of connections to a crystal and external clock. O System clock: Supplies the system clock to peripheral devices. I Reset: A Low input causes the chip to reset. I Standby: A transition to the hardware standby mode (a power-down state) occurs when a Low input is received at the STBY pin. O Address bus: Address output pins. VSS 16, 48 8, 40 1, 17, 18, 35, 51, 52 19 Clock XTAL 17 9 EXTAL 18 10 20 O System control 7 12 15 63 4 7 8 13 16 RES STBY Address bus A15 to A0 40 to 47, 32 to 39, 43 to 50, 49 to 56 41 to 48 53 to 60 11 Table 1-3. Pin Functions (2) Pin No. Type Data bus Bus control Symbol D7 to D0 DC-64S DP-64S FP-64A CP-68 57 to 64 49 to 56 61 to 68 8 64 9 I/O Name and function I/O Data bus: 8-Bit bidirectional data bus. I Wait: Requests the CPU to insert TW states into the bus cycle when an external address is accessed. O Read: Goes Low to indicate that the CPU is reading an external address. O Write: Goes Low to indicate that the CPU is writing to an external address. O Address Strobe: Goes Low to indicate that there is a valid address on the address bus. I NonMaskable Interrupt: Highestpriority interrupt request. The NMIEG bit in the system control register (SYSCR) determines whether the interrupt is requested on the rising or falling edge of the NMI input. I Interrupt Request 0 to 2: Maskable interrupt request pins. I Mode: Input pins for setting the MCU operating mode according to the table below. MD1 MD0 Mode Description 0 1 Mode 1 Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled 1 0 Mode 2 Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled 1 1 Mode 3 Single-chip mode WAIT RD WR AS 4 5 6 60 61 62 5 6 7 Interrupt signals NMI 13 5 14 Operating mode control IRQ0 to IRQ2 MD1, MD0 1 to 3 19, 20 57 to 59 2 to 4 11, 12 21, 22 12 Table 1-3. Pin Functions (3) Pin No. Type Symbol Serial com- TxD munication interface RxD SCK 16-bit free- FTOA, running FTOB timer FTCI DC-64S DP-64S FP-64A CP-68 9 1 10 10 11 32, 37 31 2 3 24, 29 23 11 12 34, 40 33 I/O Name and function O Transmit Data: Data output pin for the serial communication interface. I Receive Data: Data input pin for the serial communication interface. I/O Serial ClocK: Input/output pin for the serial clock. O FRT Output compare A and B: Output pins controlled by comparators A and B of the free-running timer. I FRT counter Clock Input: Input pin for an external clock signal for the free-running timer. I FRT Input capture A to D: Input capture pins for the free-running timer. O 8-bit TiMer Output: Compare-match output pins for the 8-bit timers. I 8-bit TiMer counter Clock Input: External clock input pins for the 8-bit timer counters. I 8-bit TiMer counter Reset Input: A High input at these pins resets the 8-bit timer counters. I ANalog input: Analog signal input pins for the A/D converter. I A/D Trigger: External trigger input for starting the A/D converter. I Analog reference Voltage: Reference voltage pin for the A/D converter. If the A/D converter is not used, connect AVCC to the system power supply (+5V). I Analog ground: Ground pin for the A/D converter. 8-bit timer FTIA to FTID TMO0, TMO1 TMCI0, TMCI1 TMRI0, TMRI1 33 to 36 25 to 28 36 to 39 35, 38 31, 36 34, 37 27, 30 23, 28 26, 29 38, 41 33, 39 37, 40 A/D converter AN7 to AN0 22 to 29 14 to 21 24 to 31 ADTRG AVCC 1 30 57 22 2 32 AVSS 21 13 23 13 Table 1-3. Pin Functions (4) Pin No. Type Generalpurpose I/O Symbol P17 to P10 DC-64S DP-64S FP-64A CP-68 49 to 56 41 to 48 53 to 60 I/O Name and function I/O Port 1: An 8-bit input/output port with programmable MOS input pull-ups and LED driving capability. The direction of each bit can be selected in the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR). I/O Port 2: An 8-bit input/output port with programmable MOS input pull-ups and LED driving capability. The direction of each bit can be selected in the port 2 data direction register (P2DDR). I/O Port 3: An 8-bit input/output port with programmable MOS input pull-ups. The direction of each bit can be selected in the port 3 data direction register (P3DDR). I/O Port 4: An 8-bit input/output port. The direction of each bit can be selected in the port 4 data direction register (P4DDR). I/O Port 5: A 3-bit input/output port. The direction of each bit can be selected in the port 5 data direction register (P5DDR). I/O Port 6: An 8-bit input/output port. The direction of each bit can be selected in the port 6 data direction register (P6DDR). I Port 7: An 8-bit input port. P27 to P20 40 to 47 32 to 39 43 to 50 P37 to P30 57 to 64 49 to 56 61 to 68 P47 to P40 1 to 8 57 to 64 2 to 9 P52 to P50 9 to 11 1 to 3 10 to 12 P67 to P60 31 to 38 23 to 30 33, 34, 36 to 41 22 to 29 14 to 21 24 to 31 P77 to P70 14 Section 2. MCU Operating Modes and Address Space 2.1 Overview 2.1.1 Mode Selection The H8/329 Series operates in three modes numbered 1, 2, and 3. The mode is selected by the inputs at the mode pins (MD1 and MD0) when the chip comes out of a reset. See table 2-1. The ROMless versions (HD6413298 and HD6413278) can be used only in mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled.) Table 2-1. Operating Modes Mode Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 MD1 Low Low High High MD0 Low High Low High Address space -- Expanded Expanded Single-chip On-chip ROM -- Disabled Enabled Enabled On-chip RAM -- Enabled* Enabled* Enabled Note: * If the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is cleared to 0, off-chip memory can be accessed instead. Modes 1 and 2 are expanded modes that permit access to off-chip memory and peripheral devices. The maximum address space supported by these externally expanded modes is 64K bytes. In mode 3 (single-chip mode), only on-chip ROM and RAM and the on-chip register field are used. All ports are available for general-purpose input and output. Mode 0 is inoperative in the H8/329 Series. Avoid setting the mode pins to mode 0. 15 2.1.2 Mode and System Control Registers (MDCR and SYSCR) Table 2-2 lists the registers related to the operating mode: the system control register (SYSCR) and mode control register (MDCR). The mode control register indicates the inputs to the mode pins MD1 and MD0. Table 2-2. Mode and System Control Registers Name System control register Mode control register Abbreviation SYSCR MDCR Read/Write R/W R Address H'FFC4 H'FFC5 2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR)--H'FFC4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 -- 1 -- 0 RAME 1 R/W The system control register (SYSCR) is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of the chip. Bit 7--Software Standby (SSBY): Enables transition to the software standby mode. For details, see section 12, "Power-Down State." On recovery from software standby mode by an external interrupt, the SSBY bit remains set to "1." It can be cleared by writing "0." Bit 7 SSBY 0 1 Description The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to sleep mode. The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to software standby mode. (Initial value) 16 Bits 6 to 4--Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the clock settling time when the chip recovers from the software standby mode by an external interrupt. During the selected time the CPU and on-chip supporting modules continue to stand by. These bits should be set according to the clock frequency so that the settling time is at least 10ms. For specific settings, see section 12.2, "System Control Register: Power-Down Control Bits." Bit 6 STS2 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 5 STS1 0 0 1 1 -- Bit 4 STS0 0 1 0 1 -- Description Settling time = 8192 states Settling time = 16384 states Settling time = 32768 states Settling time = 65536 states Settling time = 131072 states (Initial value) Bit 3--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as "1." Bit 2--NMI Edge (NMIEG): Selects the valid edge of the NMI input. Bit 2 NMIEG 0 1 Description An interrupt is requested on the falling edge of the NMI input. An interrupt is requested on the rising edge of the NMI input. (Initial value) Bit 1--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as "1." Bit 0--RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized by a reset, but is not initialized in the software standby mode. Bit 0 RAME 0 1 Description The on-chip RAM is disabled. The on-chip RAM is enabled. (Initial value) 17 2.3 Mode Control Register (MDCR)--H'FFC5 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 0 -- 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 MDS1 * R 0 MDS0 * R Note: * Initialized according to MD1 and MD0 inputs. The mode control register (MDCR) is an eight-bit register that indicates the operating mode of the chip. Bits 7 to 5--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as "1." Bits 4 and 3--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as "0." Bit 2--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as "1." Bits 1 and 0--Mode Select 1 and 0 (MDS1 and MDS0): These bits indicate the values of the mode pins (MD1 and MD0), thus indicating the current operating mode of the chip. MDS1 corresponds to MD1 and MDS0 to MD0. These bits can be read but not written. When the mode control register is read, the levels at the mode pins (MD1 and MD0) are latched in these bits. 18 2.4 Address Space Maps Figures 2-1 to 2-4 show memory maps of the H8/329, H8/328, H8/327, and H8/326 in modes 1, 2, and 3. Mode 1 Expanded Mode without On-Chip ROM H'0000 Vector Table H'0047 H'0048 H'0047 H'0048 H'0000 Mode 2 Expanded Mode with On-Chip ROM H'0000 Vector Table H'0047 H'0048 Mode 3 Single-Chip Mode Vector Table On-Chip ROM, 32k bytes On-Chip ROM, 32k bytes External Address Space H'7FFF H'8000 External Address Space H'FB7F H'FB80 On-Chip RAM *, 1k byte H'FF7F H'FF80 External Address Space H'FF87 H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF H'FB7F H'FB80 On-Chip RAM *, 1k byte H'FF7F H'FF80 External Address Space H'FF87 H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF H'7FFF H'FB80 On-Chip RAM, 1k byte H'FF7F H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF Note: * External memory can be accessed at these addresses when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is cleared to 0. Figure 2-1. H8/329 Address Space Map 19 Mode 1 Expanded Mode without On-Chip ROM H'0000 Vector Table H'0047 H'0048 H'0047 H'0048 H'0000 Mode 2 Expanded Mode with On-Chip ROM H'0000 Vector Table H'0047 H'0048 Mode 3 Single-Chip Mode Vector Table On-Chip ROM, 24k bytes On-Chip ROM, 24k bytes H'5FFF H'6000 External Address Space H'5FFF Reserved*1 H'7FFF H'8000 External Address Space H'FB7F H'FB80 On-Chip RAM *2, 1k byte H'FF7F H'FF80 External Address Space H'FF87 H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF H'FB7F H'FB80 On-Chip RAM *2, 1k byte H'FF7F H'FF80 External Address Space H'FF87 H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF H'FF7F H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF H'FB80 On-Chip RAM, 1k byte Notes: *1 Do not access these reserved areas. *2 External memory can be accessed at these addresses when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is cleared to 0. Figure 2-2. H8/328 Address Space Map H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 3-2 20 Mode 1 Expanded Mode without On-Chip ROM H'0000 Vector Table H'0047 H'0048 H'0047 H'0048 H'0000 Mode 2 Expanded Mode with On-Chip ROM H'0000 Vector Table H'0047 H'0048 Mode 3 Single-Chip Mode Vector Table On-Chip ROM, 16k bytes On-Chip ROM, 16k bytes H'3FFF H'4000 H'3FFF External Address Space Reserved*1 H'7FFF H'8000 External Address Space H'FB7F H'FB80 Reserved*1, *2 H'FD7F H'FD80 On-Chip RAM*2, 512 Bytes H'FD7F H'FD80 H'FB7F H'FB80 Reserved*1, *2 On-Chip RAM*2, 512 Bytes H'FD80 H'FF7F H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF On-Chip RAM, 512 Bytes H'FF7F H'FF80 External Address Space H'FF87 H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF H'FF7F H'FF80 External Address Space H'FF87 H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF Notes: *1 Do not access these reserved areas. *2 External memory can be accessed at these addresses when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is cleared to 0. Figure 2-3. H8/327 Address Space Map H8/329 U.M. ' Fig. 3-3 21 Mode 1 Expanded Mode without On-Chip ROM H'0000 Vector Table H'0047 H'0048 H'0047 H'0048 H'0000 Mode 2 Expanded Mode with On-Chip ROM H'0000 Vector Table H'0047 H'0048 Mode 3 Single-Chip Mode Vector Table On-Chip ROM, 8k bytes On-Chip ROM, 8k bytes H'1FFF H'2000 H'1FFF External Address Space Reserved*1 H'7FFF H'8000 External Address Space H'FB7F H'FB80 Reserved*1, *2 H'FE7F H'FE80 On-Chip RAM*2, 256 Bytes H'FE7F H'FE80 H'FB7F H'FB80 Reserved*1, *2 On-Chip RAM*2, 256 Bytes H'FE80 H'FF7F H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF On-Chip RAM, 256 Bytes H'FF7F H'FF80 External Address Space H'FF87 H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF H'FF7F H'FF80 External Address Space H'FF87 H'FF88 On-Chip Register Field H'FFFF Notes: *1 Do not access these reserved areas. *2 External memory can be accessed at these addresses when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is cleared to 0. Figure 2-4. H8/326 Address Space Map H8/329 U.M. Fig. 2-4 22 Section 3. CPU 3.1 Overview The H8/329 Series has the H8/300 CPU: a fast central processing unit with eight 16-bit general registers (also configurable as 16 eight-bit registers) and a concise instruction set designed for highspeed operation. 3.1.1 Features The main features of the H8/300 CPU are listed below. * Two-way register configuration -- Sixteen 8-bit general registers, or -- Eight 16-bit general registers * Instruction set with 57 basic instructions, including: -- Multiply and divide instructions -- Powerful bit-manipulation instructions * Eight addressing modes -- Register direct (Rn) -- Register indirect (@Rn) -- Register indirect with displacement (@(d:16, Rn)) -- Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement (@Rn+ or @-Rn) -- Absolute address (@aa:8 or @aa:16) -- Immediate (#xx:8 or #xx:16) -- PC-relative (@(d:8, PC)) -- Memory indirect (@@aa:8) * Maximum 64K-byte address space * High-speed operation -- All frequently-used instructions are executed two to four states -- The maximum clock rate is 10MHz -- 8- or 16-bit register-register add or subtract: 0.2s -- 8 x 8-bit multiply: 1.4s -- 16 / 8-bit divide: 1.4s * Power-down mode -- SLEEP instruction 23 3.2 Register Configuration Figure 3-1 shows the register structure of the CPU. There are two groups of registers: the general registers and control registers. 7 R0H R1H R2H R3H R4H R5H R6H R7H 07 R0L R1L R2L R3L R4L R5L R6L R7L 0 (SP) SP: Stack Pointer 15 PC CCR 0 PC: Program Counter 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 I UHUN ZV C CCR: Condition Code Register Carry flag Overflow flag Zero flag Negative flag Half-carry flag Interrupt mask bit User bit User bit Figure 3-1. CPU Registers 3.2.1 General Registers All the general registers can be used as both data registers and address registers. When used as Fig. 3-1 address registers, the general registers are accessed as 16-bit registers (R0 to R7). When used as data registers, they can be accessed as 16-bit registers, or the high and low bytes can be accessed separately as 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L). R7 also functions as the stack pointer, used implicitly by hardware in processing interrupts and subroutine calls. In assembly-language coding, R7 can also be denoted by the letters SP. As indicated in figure 3-2, R7 (SP) points to the top of the stack. 24 Unused area SP (R7) Stack area Figure 3-2. Stack Pointer 3.2.2 Control Registers The CPU control registers include a 16-bit program counter (PC) and an 8-bit condition code register (CCR). (1) Program Counter (PC): This 16-bit register indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. Each instruction is accessed in 16 bits (1 word), so the least significant bit of the Fig. 3-2 PC is ignored (always regarded as 0). (2) Condition Code Register (CCR): This 8-bit register contains internal status information, including carry (C), overflow (V), zero (Z), negative (N), and half-carry (H) flags and the interrupt mask bit (I). Bit 7--Interrupt Mask Bit (I): When this bit is set to "1," all interrupts except NMI are masked. This bit is set to "1" automatically by a reset and at the start of interrupt handling. Bit 6--User Bit (U): This bit can be written and read by software (using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions). Bit 5--Half-Carry Flag (H): This flag is set to "1" when the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, NEG.B, or CMP.B instruction causes a carry or borrow out of bit 3, and is cleared to "0" otherwise. Similarly, it is set to "1" when the ADD.W, SUB.W, or CMP.W instruction causes a carry or borrow out of bit 11, and cleared to "0" otherwise. It is used implicitly in the DAA and DAS instructions. Bit 4--User Bit (U): This bit can be written and read by software (using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions). 25 Bit 3--Negative Flag (N): This flag indicates the most significant bit (sign bit) of the result of an instruction. Bit 2--Zero Flag (Z): This flag is set to "1" to indicate a zero result and cleared to "0" to indicate a nonzero result. Bit 1--Overflow Flag (V): This flag is set to "1" when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to "0" at other times. Bit 0--Carry Flag (C): This flag is used by: * Add and subtract instructions, to indicate a carry or borrow at the most significant bit of the result * Shift and rotate instructions, to store the value shifted out of the most significant or least significant bit * Bit manipulation and bit load instructions, as a bit accumulator The LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions enable the CPU to load and store the CCR, and to set or clear selected bits by logic operations. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used in conditional branching instructions (BCC). For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see the H8/300 Series Programming Manual. 3.2.3 Initial Register Values When the CPU is reset, the program counter (PC) is loaded from the vector table and the interrupt mask bit (I) in the CCR is set to "1." The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (R7) is not initialized. To prevent program crashes the stack pointer should be initialized by software, by the first instruction executed after a reset. 26 3.3 Addressing Modes 3.3.1 Addressing Mode The H8/300 CPU supports eight addressing modes. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Table 3-1. Addressing Modes No. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Addressing mode Register direct Register indirect Register indirect with displacement Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement Absolute address Immediate Program-counter-relative Memory indirect Symbol Rn @Rn @(d:16, Rn) @Rn+ @-Rn @aa:8 or @aa:16 #xx:8 or #xx:16 @(d:8, PC) @@aa:8 (1) Register Direct--Rn: The register field of the instruction specifies an 8- or 16-bit general register containing the operand. In most cases the general register is accessed as an 8-bit register. Only the MOV.W, ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, ADDS, SUBS, MULXU (8 bits x 8 bits), and DIVXU (16 bits / 8 bits) instructions have 16-bit operands. (2) Register indirect--@Rn: The register field of the instruction specifies a 16-bit general register containing the address of the operand. (3) Register Indirect with Displacement--@(d:16, Rn): This mode, which is used only in MOV instructions, is similar to register indirect but the instruction has a second word (bytes 3 and 4) which is added to the contents of the specified general register to obtain the operand address. For the MOV.W instruction, the resulting address must be even. (4) Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement--@Rn+ or @-Rn: * Register indirect with Post-Increment--@Rn+ The @Rn+ mode is used with MOV instructions that load registers from memory. It is similar to the register indirect mode, but the 16-bit general register specified in the register field of the instruction is incremented after the operand is accessed. The size of the increment is 27 1 or 2 depending on the size of the operand: 1 for MOV.B; 2 for MOV.W. For MOV.W, the original contents of the 16-bit general register must be even. * Register Indirect with Pre-Decrement--@-Rn The @-Rn mode is used with MOV instructions that store register contents to memory. It is similar to the register indirect mode, but the 16-bit general register specified in the register field of the instruction is decremented before the operand is accessed. The size of the decrement is 1 or 2 depending on the size of the operand: 1 for MOV.B; 2 for MOV.W. For MOV.W, the original contents of the 16-bit general register must be even. (5) Absolute Address--@aa:8 or @aa:16: The instruction specifies the absolute address of the operand in memory. The MOV.B instruction uses an 8-bit absolute address of the form H'FFxx. The upper 8 bits are assumed to be 1, so the possible address range is H'FF00 to H'FFFF (65280 to 65535). The MOV.B, MOV.W, JMP, and JSR instructions can use 16-bit absolute addresses. (6) Immediate--#xx:8 or #xx:16: The instruction contains an 8-bit operand in its second byte, or a 16-bit operand in its third and fourth bytes. Only MOV.W instructions can contain 16-bit immediate values. The ADDS and SUBS instructions implicitly contain the value 1 or 2 as immediate data. Some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data (#xx:3) in the second or fourth byte of the instruction, specifying a bit number. (7) Program-Counter-Relative--@(d:8, PC): This mode is used to generate branch addresses in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit value in byte 2 of the instruction code is added as a signextended value to the program counter contents. The result must be an even number. The possible branching range is -126 to +128 bytes (-63 to +64 words) from the current address. (8) Memory Indirect--@@aa:8: This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The second byte of the instruction code specifies an 8-bit absolute address from H'0000 to H'00FF (0 to 255). The word located at this address contains the branch address. Note that addresses H'0000 to H'0047 (0 to 71) are located in the vector table. If an odd address is specified as a branch destination or as the operand address of a MOV.W instruction, the least significant bit is regarded as "0," causing word access to be performed at the address preceding the specified address. See section 3.4.2, "Memory Data Formats," for further information. 28 3.3.2 How to Calculate Where the Execution Starts Table 3-2 shows how to calculate the Effective Address (EA: Effective Address) for each addressing mode. In the operation instruction, 1) register direct, as well as 6) immediate (for each instruction, ADD.B, ADDX, SUBX, CMP.B, AND, OR, XOR) are used. In the move instruction, 7) program counter relative and 8) all addressing mode to delete the memory indirect can be used. In the bit manipulation instruction for the operand specifications, 1) register direct, 2) register indirect, as well as 5) absolute address (8 bit) can be used. Furthermore, to specify the bit number within the operand, 1) register direct (for each instruction, BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST) as well as 6) immediate (3 bit) can be used independently. 29 Table 3-2. Effective Address Calculation (1) No. 1 Addressing mode and instruction format Register direct, Rn 15 op 87 regm 43 regn 15 16-bit register contents 15 op 3 76 43 reg 15 16-bit register contents 0 15 0 0 0 15 0 0 Operands are contained in registers regm and regn Effective address calculation Effective address 3 regm 0 3 regn 0 2 Register indirect, @Rn Register indirect with displacement, @(d:16, Rn) 15 76 43 0 op disp reg disp 4 Register indirect with post-increment, @Rn+ 15 76 op 15 16-bit register contents 43 reg 15 0 0 15 0 Register indirect with pre-decrement, @-Rn 15 op 76 43 reg 0 1 or 2 * 0 16-bit register contents 15 0 1 or 2 * Note: * 1 for a byte operand, 2 for a word operand Table 3-2. Effective Address Calculation (2) No. 5 Addressing mode and instruction format Absolute address @aa:8 15 87 op @aa:16 15 op abs 6 Immediate #xx:8 15 op #xx:16 15 op IMM 7 PC-relative @(d:8, PC) 15 PC contents 0 15 0 abs 15 0 0 Effective address calculation Effective address 15 87 H'FF 0 0 87 IMM 0 Operand is 1- or 2-byte immediate data 0 15 op 87 disp 0 Sign extension disp Table 3-2. Effective Address Calculation (3) No. 8 Addressing mode and instruction format Memory indirect, @@aa:8 15 op 87 abs 15 H'00 15 Memory contents (16 bits) 0 87 0 0 Effective address calculation Effective address Notation reg: General register op: Operation code disp: Displacement IMM: Immediate data abs: Absolute address 3.4 Data Formats The H8/300 CPU can process 1-bit data, 4-bit (BCD) data, 8-bit (byte) data, and 16-bit (word) data. * Bit manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data specified as bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) in a byte operand. * All arithmetic and logic instructions except ADDS and SUBS can operate on byte data. * The DAA and DAS instruction perform decimal arithmetic adjustments on byte data in packed BCD form. Each nibble of the byte is treated as a decimal digit. * The MOV.W, ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, ADDS, SUBS, MULXU (8 bits x 8 bits), and DIVXU (16 bits / 8 bits) instructions operate on word data. 33 3.4.1 Data Formats in General Registers Data of all the sizes above can be stored in general registers as shown in figure 3-3. Data type 1-Bit data Register No. RnH Data format 7 0 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 Don't-care 1-Bit data RnL Don't-care 7 0 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 7 Byte data RnH M S B 0 L S B Don't-care 7 Byte data RnL Don't-care M S B 0 L S B 15 Word data Rn M S B 0 L S B 7 4-Bit BCD data RnH 43 0 Don't-care Upper digit Lower digit 7 4-Bit BCD data RnL Don't-care 43 0 Upper digit Lower digit Figure 3-3. Register Data Formats Note: RnH: RnL: MSB: LSB: Upper digit of general register Lower digit of general register Most significant bit Least significant bit 34 3.4.2 Memory Data Formats Figure 3-4 indicates the data formats in memory. Word data stored in memory must always begin at an even address. In word access the least significant bit of the address is regarded as "0." If an odd address is specified, no address error occurs but the access is performed at the preceding even address. This rule affects MOV.W instructions and branching instructions, and implies that only even addresses should be stored in the vector table. Data type Address Data format 1-Bit data Byte data Address n Address n Even address Odd address Even address Odd address Even address Odd address CCR: Condition Code Register Note: * Ignored when returned 7 0 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 M S B L S B Word data M S B Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits L S B Byte data (CCR) on stack M S B M S B CCR CCR* L S B L S B M S B L S B Word data on stack Figure 3-4. Memory Data Formats When the stack is addressed using R7, it must always be accessed a word at a time. When the CCR is pushed on the stack, two identical copies of the CCR are pushed to make a complete word. When they are returned, the lower byte is ignored. 35 3.5 Instruction Set Table 3-3 lists the H8/300 instruction set. Table 3-3. Instruction Classification Function Data transfer Arithmetic operations Logic operations Shift Bit manipulation Branch System control Block data transfer Instructions Types MOV, MOVTPE*3, MOVFPE*3, PUSH*1, POP*1 3 ADD, SUB, ADDX, SUBX, INC, DEC, ADDS, SUBS, 14 DAA, DAS, MULXU, DIVXU, CMP, NEG AND, OR, XOR, NOT 4 SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, 8 ROTXR BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, 14 BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST Bcc*2, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS 5 RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP 8 EEPMOV 1 Total 57 Notes: *1 PUSH Rn is equivalent to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. POP Rn is equivalent to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. *2 Bcc is a conditional branch instruction in which cc represents a condition code. *3 Not supported by the H8/329 Series. The following sections give a concise summary of the instructions in each category, and indicate the bit patterns of their object code. The notation used is defined next. 36 Operation Notation Rd Rs Rn (EAd) (EAs) SP PC CCR N Z V C #imm General register (destination) General register (source) General register Destination operand Source operand Stack pointer Program counter Condition code register N (negative) flag of CCR Z (zero) flag of CCR V (overflow) flag of CCR C (carry) flag of CCR Immediate data #xx:3 #xx:8 #xx:16 disp + - x / 3-Bit immediate data 8-Bit immediate data 16-Bit immediate data Displacement Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division AND logical OR logical Exclusive OR logical Move Not 37 3.5.1 Data Transfer Instructions Table 3-4 describes the data transfer instructions. Figure 3-5 shows their object code formats. Table 3-4. Data Transfer Instructions Instruction MOV Size* B/W Function (EAs) Rd, Rs (EAd) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. The Rn, @Rn, @(d:16, Rn), @aa:16, #xx:8 or #xx:16, @-Rn, and @Rn+ addressing modes are available for byte or word data. The @aa:8 addressing mode is available for byte data only. The @-R7 and @R7+ modes require word operands. Do not specify byte size for these two modes. Not supported by the H8/329 Series. Not supported by the H8/329 Series. Rn @-SP Pushes a 16-bit general register onto the stack. Equivalent to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. @SP+ Rn Pops a 16-bit general register from the stack. Equivalent to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. MOVTPE MOVFPE PUSH B B W POP W Note: * Size: operand size B: Byte W: Word 38 15 Op 8 7 rm rm rm rn rn rn 0 MOV Rm Rn Rn @Rm, or @Rm @(d:16, Rm) Rn, or Rn @(d:16, Rm) @Rm+ Rn, or Rn @-Rm @aa:8 Rn, or Rn @aa:8 Op Rn Op disp. Op rm rn Op abs. abs. rn Op rn @aa:16 Rn, or Rn @aa:16 #xx:8 Rn #xx:16 Rn Op rn Op #imm. #imm. rn Op abs. rn MOVFPE, MOVTPE Op rn PUSH, POP Op: rm, rn: disp.: abs.: #imm.: Operation field Register field Displacement Absolute address Immediate data Figure 3-5. Data Transfer Instruction Codes 39 3.5.2 Arithmetic Operations Table 3-5 describes the arithmetic instructions. See figure 3-6 in section 3.5.4, "Shift Operations" for their object codes. Table 3-5. Arithmetic Instructions Instruction ADD SUB Size* B/W Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd + #imm Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or addition on immediate data and data in a general register. Immediate data cannot be subtracted from data in a general register. Word data can be added or subtracted only when both words are in general registers. Rd Rs C Rd, Rd #imm C Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on byte data in two general registers, or addition or subtraction on immediate data and data in a general register. Rd #1 Rd Increments or decrements a general register. Rd #imm Rd Adds or subtracts immediate data to or from data in a general register. The immediate data must be 1 or 2. Rd decimal adjust Rd Decimal-adjusts (adjusts to packed BCD) an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to the CCR. Rd x Rs Rd Performs 8-bit x 8-bit unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers, providing a 16-bit result. Rd / Rs Rd Performs 16-bit / 8-bit unsigned division on data in two general registers, providing an 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder. Rd - Rs, Rd - #imm Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data. Word data can be compared only between two general registers. 0 - Rd Rd Obtains the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. ADDX SUBX B INC DEC ADDS SUBS DAA DAS MULXU B W B B DIVXU B CMP B/W NEG B Note: * Size: operand size B: Byte W: Word 40 3.5.3 Logic Operations Table 3-6 describes the four instructions that perform logic operations. See figure 3-6 in section 3.5.4, "Shift Operations," for their object codes. Table 3-6. Logic Operation Instructions Instruction AND Size* B Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #imm Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd Rs Rd, Rd #imm Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd Rs Rd, Rd #imm Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. (Rd) (Rd) Obtains the one's complement (logical complement) of general register contents. OR B XOR B NOT B Note: * Size: operand size B: Byte 3.5.4 Shift Operations Table 3-7 describes the eight shift instructions. Figure 3-6 shows the object code formats of the arithmetic, logic, and shift instructions. Table 3-7. Shift Instructions Instruction SHAL SHAR SHLL SHLR ROTL ROTR ROTXL ROTXR Size* B B B B Function Rd shift Rd Performs an arithmetic shift operation on general register contents. Rd shift Rd Performs a logical shift operation on general register contents. Rd rotate Rd Rotates general register contents. Rd rotate through carry Rd Rotates general register contents through the C (carry) bit. Note: * Size: operand size B: Byte 41 15 Op 8 7 rm rn 0 ADD, SUB, CMP ADDX, SUBX (Rm), MULXU, DIVXU Op rn ADDS, SUBS, INC, DEC, DAA, DAS, NEG, NOT Op rn #imm. ADD, ADDX, SUBX, CMP (#xx:8) Op rm rn Op #imm. rn AND, OR, XOR (Rm) Op AND, OR, XOR (#xx:8) rn SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR Op: rm, rn: #imm.: Operation field Register field Immediate data Figure 3-6. Arithmetic, Logic, and Shift Instruction Codes 42 3.5.5 Bit Manipulations Table 3-8 describes the bit-manipulation instructions. Figure 3-7 shows their object code formats. Table 3-8. Bit-Manipulation Instructions (1) Instruction BSET Size* B Function 1 ( BCLR B BNOT B BTST B BAND BIAND B BOR BIOR B BXOR B Note: * Size: operand size B: Byte 43 Table 3-8. Bit-Manipulation Instructions (2) Instruction BIXOR Size* B Function C [( BLD BILD B BST BIST B Note: * Size: operand size B: Byte Notes on Bit Manipulation Instructions: BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST are read-modifywrite instructions. They read a byte of data, modify one bit in the byte, then write the byte back. Care is required when these instructions are applied to registers with write-only bits and to the I/O port registers. Step 1 Read 2 Modify 3 Write Description Read one data byte at the specified address Modify one bit in the data byte Write the modified data byte back to the specified address Example: BCLR is executed to clear bit 0 in the port 4 data direction register (P4DDR) under the following conditions. P47: Input pin, Low P46: Input pin, High P45 - P40: Output pins, Low The intended purpose of this BCLR instruction is to switch P40 from output to input. 44 Before Execution of BCLR Instruction P47 Input Low 0 1 P46 Input High 0 0 P45 Output Low 1 0 P44 Output Low 1 0 P43 Output Low 1 0 P42 Output Low 1 0 P41 Output Low 1 0 P40 Output Low 1 0 Input/output Pin state DDR DR Execution of BCLR Instruction BCLR #0, @P4DDR ;clear bit 0 in data direction register After Execution of BCLR Instruction P47 Output Low 1 1 P46 Output High 1 0 P45 Output Low 1 0 P44 Output Low 1 0 P43 Output Low 1 0 P42 Output Low 1 0 P41 Output Low 1 0 P40 Input High 0 0 Input/output Pin state DDR DR Explanation: To execute the BCLR instruction, the CPU begins by reading P4DDR. Since P4DDR is a write-only register, it is read as H'FF, even though its true value is H'3F. Next the CPU clears bit 0 of the read data, changing the value to H'FE. Finally, the CPU writes this value (H'FE) back to P4DDR to complete the BCLR instruction. As a result, P40DDR is cleared to "0," making P40 an input pin. In addition, P47DDR and P46DDR are set to "1," making P47 and P46 output pins. 45 15 Op 8 7 #imm. rm rn #imm. rn rm rn rn 0 BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST Operand: register direct (Rn) Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3) Operand: register direct (Rn) Bit No.: register direct (Rm) Op Op Op 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operand: register indirect (@Rn) Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3) Operand: register indirect (@Rn) Bit No.: register direct (Rm) Op Op Op Op #imm. abs. 00 abs. 00 rn 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operand: absolute (@aa:8) Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3) Op Op rm #imm. rn #imm. 0 0 Operand: absolute (@aa:8) Bit No.: register direct (Rm) BAND, BOR, BXOR, BLD, BST Operand: register direct (Rn) Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3) Op Op Op 00 00 Operand: register indirect (@Rn) Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3) Op Op #imm. abs. 00 rn 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operand: absolute (@aa:8) Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3) BIAND, BIOR, BIXOR, BILD, BIST Operand: register direct (Rn) Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3) Op #imm. rn #imm. Op Op 0 0 0 0 Operand: register indirect (@Rn) Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3) Operand: absolute (@aa:8) Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3) Op Op abs. #imm. 0 0 0 0 Op: rm, rn: abs.: #imm.: Operation field Register field Absolute address Immediate data Figure 3-7. Bit Manipulation Instruction Codes 46 3.5.6 Branching Instructions Table 3-9 describes the branching instructions. Figure 3-8 shows their object code formats. Table 3-9. Branching Instructions Instruction Bcc Size -- Function Branches to the specified address if condition cc is true. Mnemonic BRA (BT) BRN (BF) BHI BLS BCC (BHS) BCS (BLO) BNE BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE JMP JSR BSR RTS -- -- -- -- cc field 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Description Always (True) Never (False) High Low or Same Carry Clear (High or Same) Carry Set (Low) Not Equal Equal Overflow Clear Overflow Set Plus Minus Greater or Equal Less Than Greater Than Less or Equal Condition Always Never CZ=0 CZ=1 C=0 C=1 Z=0 Z=1 V=0 V=1 N=0 N=1 NV=0 NV=1 Z (N V) = 0 Z (N V) = 1 Branches unconditionally to a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified displacement from the current address. Returns from a subroutine 47 15 Op Op cc 8 7 disp. rm 0 Bcc 0 0 0 0 JMP (@Rm) Op abs. JMP (@aa:16) Op abs. JMP (@@aa:8) Op rm disp. BSR Op 0 0 0 0 JSR (@Rm) Op abs. JSR (@aa:16) Op abs. JSR (@@aa:8) Op RTS Op: cc: rm: disp.: abs.: Operation field Condition field Register field Displacement Absolute address Figure 3-8. Branching Instruction Codes 48 3.5.7 System Control Instructions Table 3-10 describes the system control instructions. Figure 3-9 shows their object code formats. Table 3-10. System Control Instructions Instruction RTE SLEEP LDC Size -- -- B Function Returns from an exception-handling routine. Causes a transition to the power-down state. Rs CCR, #imm CCR Moves immediate data or general register contents to the condition code register. CCR Rd Copies the condition code register to a specified general register. CCR #imm CCR Logically ANDs the condition code register with immediate data. CCR #imm CCR Logically ORs the condition code register with immediate data. CCR #imm CCR Logically exclusive-ORs the condition code register with immediate data. PC + 2 PC Only increments the program counter. STC ANDC ORC XORC B B B B NOP -- Note: * Size: operand size B: Byte 49 15 8 7 Op 0 RTE, SLEEP, NOP Op rn LDC, STC (Rn) Op #imm. ANDC, ORC, XORC, LDC (#xx:8) Op: rn: #imm.: Operation field Register field Immediate data Figure 3-9. System Control Instruction Codes 3.5.8 Block Data Transfer Instruction Table 3-11 describes the EEPMOV instruction. Figure 3-10 shows its object code format. Table 3-11. Block Data Transfer Instruction/EEPROM Write Operation Instruction EEPMOV Size -- Function if R4L 0 then repeat @R5+ @R6+ R4L - 1 R4L until R4L = 0 else next; Moves a data block according to parameters set in general registers R4L, R5, and R6. R4L: size of block (bytes) R5: starting source address R6: starting destination address Execution of the next instruction starts as soon as the block transfer is completed. 50 15 8 Op Op 7 0 EEPROM Op: Operation field Figure 3-10. Block Data Transfer Instruction/EEPROM Write Operation Code Notes on EEPMOV Instruction 1. The EEPMOV instruction is a block data transfer instruction. It moves the number of bytes specified by R4L from the address specified by R5 to the address specified by R6. R5 R5 + R4L R6 R6 + R4L 2. When setting R4L and R6, make sure that the final destination address (R6 + R4L) does not exceed H'FFFF. The value in R6 must not change from H'FFFF to H'0000 during execution of the instruction. R5 R5 + R4L R6 H'FFFF Not allowed R6 + R4L 3.6 CPU States The CPU has three states: the program execution state, exception-handling state, and power-down state. The power-down state is further divided into three modes: the sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. Figure 3-11 summarizes these states, and figure 3-12 shows a map of the state transitions. State Program execution state The CPU executes successive program instructions. Exception-handling state A transient state triggered by a reset or interrupt. The CPU executes a hardware sequence that includes loading the program counter from the vector table. Power-down state A state in which some or all of the chip functions are stopped to conserve power. Sleep mode Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Figure 3-11. Operating States 51 Exception handling request Exception handling state Program execution state Exception handing SLEEP instruction SLEEP instruction with SSBY bit set Sleep mode Interrupt request NMI or IRQ0 to IRQ2 STBY=1, RES=0 RES = 1 Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Power-down state Reset state Notes: *1 A transition to the reset state occurs when RES goes Low, except when the chip is in the hardware standby mode. *2 A transition from any state to the hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes Low. Figure 3-12. State Transitions 3.6.1 Program Execution State In this state the CPU executes program instructions. 3.6.2 Exception-Handling State The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU is reset or accepts an interrupt. In this state the CPU carries out a hardware-controlled sequence that prepares it to execute a user-coded exception-handling routine. In the hardware exception-handling sequence the CPU does the following: (1) Saves the program counter and condition code register to the stack (except in the case of a reset). (2) Sets the interrupt mask (I) bit in the condition code register to "1." (3) Fetches the start address of the exception-handling routine from the vector table. (4) Branches to that address, returning to the program execution state. See section 4, "Exception Handling," for further information on the exception-handling state. Fig. 3-12 52 3.6.3 Power-Down State The power-down state includes three modes: the sleep mode, the software standby mode, and the hardware standby mode. (1) Sleep Mode: The sleep mode is entered when a SLEEP instruction is executed. The CPU halts, but CPU register contents remain unchanged and the on-chip supporting modules continue to function. (2) Software Standby Mode: The software standby mode is entered if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY (Software Standby) bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set. The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules halt. The on-chip supporting modules are initialized, but the contents of the on-chip RAM and CPU registers remain unchanged. I/O port outputs also remain unchanged. (3) Hardware Standby Mode: The hardware standby mode is entered when the input at the STBY pin goes Low. All chip functions halt, including I/O port output. The on-chip supporting modules are initialized, but on-chip RAM contents are held. See section 12, "Power-Down State," for further information. 3.7 Access Timing and Bus Cycle The CPU is driven by the system clock (O). The period from one rising edge of the system clock to the next is referred to as a "state." Memory access is performed in a two- or three-state bus cycle. On-chip memory, on-chip supporting modules, and external devices are accessed in different bus cycles as described below. 3.7.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM and ROM) On-chip ROM and RAM are accessed in a cycle of two states designated T1 and T2. Either byte or word data can be accessed, via a 16-bit data bus. Figure 3-13 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 3-14 shows the associated pin states. 53 Bus cycle T1 state T2 state O Internal address bus Address Internal Read signal Internal data bus (read) Read data Internal Write signal Internal data bus (write) Write data Figure 3-13. On-Chip Memory Access Cycle Bus cycle T1 state T2 state O Address bus Address AS: High RD: High WR: High Data bus: high impedance state Figure 3-14. Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access Cycle 54 3.7.2 Access to On-Chip Register Field and External Devices The on-chip register field (I/O ports, on-chip supporting module registers, etc.) and external devices are accessed in a cycle consisting of three states: T1, T2, and T3. Only one byte of data can be accessed per cycle, via an 8-bit data bus. Access to word data or instruction codes requires two consecutive cycles (six states). Figure 3-15 shows the access cycle for the on-chip register field. Figure 3-16 shows the associated pin states. Figures 3-17 (a) and (b) show the read and write access timing for external devices. Bus cycle T1 state T2 state T3 state O Internal address bus Internal Read signal Internal data bus (read) Read data Address Internal Write signal Internal data bus (write) Write data Figure 3-15. On-Chip Register Field Access Cycle 55 Bus cycle T1 state T2 state T3 state O Address bus Address AS: High RD: High WR: High Data bus: high impedance state Figure 3-16. Pin States during On-Chip Register Field Access Cycle Read cycle T1 state T2 state T3 state O Address bus Address AS RD WR: High Data bus Read data Figure 3-17 (a). External Device Access Timing (Read) 56 Write cycle T1 state T2 state T3 state O Address bus Address AS RD: High WR Data bus Write data Figure 3-17 (b). External Device Access Timing (Write) 57 Section 4. Exception Handling 4.1 Overview The H8/329 Series recognizes only two kinds of exceptions: interrupts and the reset. Table 4-1 indicates their priority and the timing of their hardware exception-handling sequences. Table 4-1. Hardware Exception-Handling Sequences and Priority Type of exception Reset Interrupt Low Priority High Timing of exception-handling sequence The hardware exception-handling sequence begins as soon as RES changes from Low to High. When an interrupt is requested, the hardware exception-handling sequence begins at the end of the current instruction, or at the end of the current hardware exception-handling sequence. 4.2 Reset 4.2.1 Overview A reset has the highest exception-handling priority. When the RES pin goes Low, all current processing stops and the chip enters the reset state. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized. When RES returns from Low to High, the reset exception-handling sequence starts. 4.2.2 Reset Sequence The reset state begins when RES goes Low. To ensure correct resetting, at power-on the RES pin should be held Low for at least 20ms. In a reset during operation, the RES pin should be held Low for at least 10 system clock cycles. For the pin states during a reset, see appendix C, "Pin States." When RES returns from Low to High, hardware carries out the following reset exception-handling sequence. 59 (1) The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, and the I bit in the condition code register (CCR) is set to "1." (2) The CPU loads the program counter with the first word in the vector table (stored at addresses H'0000 and H'0001) and starts program execution. The RES pin should be held Low when power is switched off, as well as when power is switched on. Figure 4-1 indicates the timing of the reset sequence in modes 2 and 3. Figure 4-2 indicates the timing in mode 1. Vector fetch RES Internal processing Instruction prefetch O Internal address bus Internal Read signal Internal Write signal Internal data bus (16 bits) (1) (2) (2) (3) (1) Reset vector address (H'0000) (2) Starting address of program (contents of H'0000-H'0001) (3) First instruction of program Figure 4-1. Reset Sequence (Mode 2 or 3, Program Stored in On-Chip ROM) Figure. 4-1 60 Vector fetch RES Internal processing Instruction prefetch O A15 to A0 (1) (3) (5) (7) RD WR D7 to D0 (8 bits) (2) (4) (6) (8) (1),(3) Reset vector address: (1)=H'0000, (3)=H'0001 (2),(4) Starting address of program (contents of reset vector): (2)=upper byte, (4)=lower byte (5),(7) Starting address of program: (5)=(2)(4), (7)=(2)(4)+1 (6),(8) First instruction of program: (6)=first byte, (8)=second byte Figure 4-2. Reset Sequence (Mode 1) 4.2.3 Disabling of Interrupts after Reset After a reset, if an interrupt were to be accepted before initialization of the stack pointer (SP: R7), the program counter and condition code register might not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupts, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. The first program instruction is therefore always executed. This instruction should initialize the stack pointer (example: MOV.W #xx:16, SP). 4.3 Interrupts 4.3.1 Overview The interrupt sources include four input pins for external interrupts (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2) and 18 internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Table 4-2 lists the interrupt sources in priority order and gives their vector addresses. When two or more interrupts are requested, the interrupt with highest priority is served first. The features of these interrupts are: * NMI has the highest priority and is always accepted. All internal and external interrupts except NMI can be masked by the I bit in the CCR. When the I bit is set to "1," interrupts other than NMI are not accepted. * IRQ0 to IRQ2 can be sensed on the falling edge of the input signal, or level-sensed. The type of sensing can be selected for each interrupt individually. NMI is edge-sensed, and either the rising or falling edge can be selected. * All interrupts are individually vectored. The software interrupt-handling routine does not have to determine what type of interrupt has occurred. 62 Table 4-2. Interrupts Address of entry in vector table H'0006 - H'0007 H'0008 - H'0009 H'000A - H'000B H'000C - H'000D H'000E - H'000F H'0010 - H'0011 H'0012 - H'0013 H'0014 - H'0015 H'0016 - H'0017 H'0018 - H'0019 H'001A - H'001B H'001C - H'001D H'001E - H'001F H'0020 - H'0021 H'0022 - H'0023 H'0024 - H'0025 H'0026 - H'0027 H'0028 - H'0029 H'002A - H'002B H'002C - H'002D H'002E - H'002F H'0030 - H'0031 H'0032 - H'0033 H'0034 - H'0035 H'0036 - H'0037 H'0038 - H'0039 H'003A - H'003B H'003C - H'003D H'003E - H'003F H'0040 - H'0041 H'0042 - H'0043 H'0044 - H'0045 H'0046 - H'0047 Interrupt source NMI IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 Reserved 16-Bit freerunning timer 8-Bit timer 0 8-Bit timer 1 ICIA (Input capture A) ICIB (Input capture B) ICIC (Input capture C) ICID (Input capture D) OCIA (Output compare A) OCIB (Output compare B) FOVI (Overflow) CMI0A (Compare-match A) CMI0B (Compare-match B) OVI0 (Overflow) CMI1A (Compare-match A) CMI1B (Compare-match B) OVI1 (Overflow) Reserved Serial communication interface Reserved ERI (Receive error) RXI (Receive end) TXI (TDR empty) TEI (TSR empty) A/D converter ADI (Conversion end) No. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Priority High Low Notes: 1. H'0000 and H'0001 contain the reset vector. 2. H'0002 to H'0005 are reserved in the H8/329 Series and are not available to the user. 63 4.3.2 Interrupt-Related Registers The interrupt-related registers are the system control register (SYSCR), IRQ sense control register (ISCR), and IRQ enable register (IER). Table 4-3. Registers Read by Interrupt Controller Name System control register IRQ sense control register IRQ enable register Abbreviation SYSCR ISCR IER Read/Write R/W R/W R/W Address H'FFC4 H'FFC6 H'FFC7 System Control Register (SYSCR)--H'FFC4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 -- 1 -- 0 RAME 1 R/W The valid edge on the NMI line is controlled by bit 2 (NMIEG) in the system control register. Bit 2--NMI Edge (NMIEG): Determines whether a nonmaskable interrupt is generated on the falling or rising edge of the NMI input signal. Bit 2 NMIEG 0 1 Description An interrupt is generated on the falling edge of NMI. An interrupt is generated on the rising edge of NMI. (Initial state) See section 2.2, "System Control Register," for information on the other SYSCR bits. IRQ Sense Control Register (ISCR)--H'FFC6 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 1 0 IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Bits 3 to 7--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as "1." 64 Bits 0 to 2--IRQ0 to IRQ2 Sense Control (IRQ0SC to IRQ2SC): These bits determine whether IRQ0 to IRQ2 are level-sensed or sensed on the falling edge. Bits 0 to 2 IRQ0SC to IRQ2SC 0 1 Description An interrupt is generated when IRQ0 to IRQ2 (Initial state) inputs are Low. An interrupt is generated by the falling edge of the IRQ0 to IRQ2 inputs. IRQ Enable Register (IER)--H'FFC7 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 IRQ2E 0 R/W 1 IRQ1E 0 R/W 0 IRQ0E 0 R/W Bits 3 to 7--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as "1." Bits 0 to 2--IRQ0 to IRQ2 Enable (IRQ0E to IRQ2E): These bits enable or disable the IRQ0 to IRQ2 interrupts individually. Bits 0 to 2 IRQ0E to IRQ2E 0 1 Description IRQ0 to IRQ2 interrupt requests are disabled. IRQ0 to IRQ2 interrupt requests are enabled. (Initial state) When edge sensing is selected (by setting bits IRQ0SC to IRQ7SC to "1"), it is possible for an interrupt-handling routine to be executed even though the corresponding enable bit (IRQ0E to IRQ7E) is cleared to "0" and the interrupt is disabled. If an interrupt is requested while the enable bit (IRQ0E to IRQ7E) is set to "1," the request will be held pending until served. If the enable bit is cleared to "0" while the request is still pending, the request will remain pending, although new requests will not be recognized. If the interrupt mask bit (I) in the CCR is cleared to "0," the interrupt-handling routine can be executed even though the enable bit is now "0." 65 If execution of interrupt-handling routines under these conditions is not desired, it can be avoided by using the following procedure to disable and clear interrupt requests. 1. Set the I bit to "1" in the CCR, masking interrupts. Note that the I bit is set to 1 automatically when execution jumps to an interrupt vector. 2. Clear the desired bits from IRQ0E to IRQ7E to "0" to disable new interrupt requests. 3. Clear the corresponding IRQ0SC to IRQ7SC bits to "0," then set them to "1" again. Pending IRQn interrupt requests are cleared when I = "1" in the CCR, IRQnSC = "0," and IRQnE = "0." 4.3.3 External Interrupts The external interrupts are NMI and IRQ0 to IRQ2. These four interrupts can be used to recover from software standby mode. (1) NMI: A nonmaskable interrupt is generated on the rising or falling edge of the NMI input signal regardless of whether the I (interrupt mask) bit is set in the CCR. The valid edge is selected by the NMIEG bit in the system control register. The NMI vector number is 3. In the NMI hardware exception-handling sequence the I bit in the CCR is set to "1." (2) IRQ0 to IRQ2: These interrupt signals are level-sensed or sensed on the falling edge of the input, as selected by ISCR bits IRQ0SC to IRQ2SC. These interrupts can be masked collectively by the I bit in the CCR, and can be enabled and disabled individually by setting and clearing bits IRQ0E to IRQ2E in the IRQ enable register. When one of these interrupts is accepted, the I bit is set to "1." IRQ0 to IRQ2 have interrupt vector numbers 4 to 6. They are prioritized in order from IRQ2 (Low) to IRQ0 (High). For details, see table 4-2. Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ2 do not depend on whether pins IRQ0 to IRQ2 are input or output pins. When using external interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ2, clear the corresponding DDR bits to "0" to set these pins to the input state, and do not use these pins for input to the A/D converter. 66 4.3.4 Internal Interrupts Eighteen internal interrupts can be requested by the on-chip supporting modules. Each interrupt source has its own vector number, so the interrupt-handling routine does not have to determine which interrupt has occurred. All internal interrupts are masked when the I bit in the CCR is set to "1." When one of these interrupts is accepted, the I bit is set to 1 to mask further interrupts (except NMI). The vector numbers are 12 to 35. For the priority order, see table 4-2. 4.3.5 Interrupt Handling Interrupts are controlled by an interrupt controller that arbitrates between simultaneous interrupt requests, commands the CPU to start the hardware interrupt exception-handling sequence, and furnishes the necessary vector number. Figure 4-3 shows a block diagram of the interrupt controller. NMI interrupt IRQ0 flag IRQ0E * IRQ0 interrupt Priority decision Interrupt controller CPU Interrupt request Vector number ADF ADIE ADI interrupt I (CCR) Note: * For edge-sensed interrupts, these AND gates change to the circuit shown below. IRQ0 flag IRQ0 edge IRQ0E SQ IRQ0 interrupt Figure 4-3. Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller 67 The IRQ interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules all have corresponding enable bits. When the enable bit is cleared to "0," the interrupt signal is not sent to the interrupt controller, so the interrupt is ignored. These interrupts can also all be masked by setting the CPU's interrupt mask bit (I) to "1." Accordingly, these interrupts are accepted only when their enable bit is set to "1" and the I bit is cleared to "0." The nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) is always accepted, except in the reset state and hardware standby mode. When an NMI or another enabled interrupt is requested, the interrupt controller transfers the interrupt request to the CPU and indicates the corresponding vector number. (When two or more interrupts are requested, the interrupt controller selects the vector number of the interrupt with the highest priority.) When notified of an interrupt request, at the end of the current instruction or current hardware exception-handling sequence, the CPU starts the hardware exception-handling sequence for the interrupt and latches the vector number. Figure 4-4 is a flowchart of the interrupt (and reset) operations. Figure 4-6 shows the interrupt timing sequence for the case in which the software interrupt-handling routine is in on-chip ROM and the stack is in on-chip RAM. (1) An interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller when an NMI interrupt occurs, and when an interrupt occurs on an IRQ input line or in an on-chip supporting module provided the enable bit of that interrupt is set to "1." (2) The interrupt controller checks the I bit in the CCR and accepts the interrupt request if the I bit is cleared to "0." If the I bit is set to "1" only NMI requests are accepted; other interrupt requests remain pending. (3) Among all accepted interrupt requests, the interrupt controller selects the request with the highest priority and passes it to the CPU. Other interrupt requests remain pending. (4) When it receives the interrupt request, the CPU waits until completion of the current instruction or hardware exception-handling sequence, then starts the hardware exception-handling sequence for the interrupt and latches the interrupt vector number. (5) In the hardware exception-handling sequence, the CPU first pushes the PC and CCR onto the stack. See figure 4-5. The stacked PC indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed on return from the software interrupt-handling routine. (6) Next the I bit in the CCR is set to "1," masking all further interrupts except NMI. (7) The vector address corresponding to the vector number is generated, the vector table entry at this vector address is loaded into the program counter, and execution branches to the software interrupt-handling routine at the address indicated by that entry. 68 Program execution Interrupt requested? Yes Yes NMI? No No No I = 0? Yes IRQ0? Yes IRQ1? Yes ADI? Yes No No Pending Latch vector No. Save PC Reset Save CCR I1 Read vector address Branch to software interrupt-handling routine Figure 4-4. Hardware Interrupt-Handling Sequence H161 H8/337 H.M '9 Fig. 4-4 69 SP-4 SP-3 SP-2 SP-1 SP(R7) Stack area SP(R7) SP+1 SP+2 SP+3 SP+4 CCR CCR* PC (upper byte) PC (lower byte) Even address Before interrupt is accepted Pushed onto stack After interrupt is accepted PC: Program counter CCR: Condition code register SP: Stack pointer Notes: 1. The PC contains the address of the first instruction executed after return. 2. Registers must be saved and restored by word access at an even address. * Ignored on return. Figure 4-5. Usage of Stack in Interrupt Handling Figure. 4-5 70 Interrupt accepted Interrupt priority decision. Wait for Instruction Internal end of instruction. fetch processing Interrupt request signal Vector fetch Stack Instruction fetch (first instruction of Internal interrupt-handling process- routine) ing O Internal address bus (1) (3) (5) (6) (8) (9) Internal Read signal Internal Write signal Internal 16-bit data bus (2) (4) (1) (7) (9) (10) (1) (1) Instruction prefetch address (Pushed on stack. Instruction is executed on return from interrupt-handling routine.) Instruction prefetch address (Pushed on stack. Instruction is executed on return from interrupt-handling routine.) (2) (4) Instruction code (Not executed) (2) (4) Instruction codeprefetch address (Not executed) (3) Instruction (Not executed) (3) (5) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed) SP-2 (5) (6) SP-2 SP-4 (6) (7) SP-4 CCR (7) CCR (8) Address of vector table entry (8) Address of vector table entry (9) Vector table entryentry (address of first instruction of interrupt-handling routine) Vector table (address of first instruction interrupt-handling routine) (9) (10) First instruction of interrupt-handling (10) First instruction of interrupt-handling routine routine Figure 4-6. Timing of Interrupt Sequence Figure. 4-5 71 4.3.6 Interrupt Response Time Table 4-4 indicates the number of states that elapse from an interrupt request signal until the first instruction of the software interrupt-handling routine is executed. Since the H8/329 Series accesses its on-chip memory 16 bits at a time, very fast interrupt service can be obtained by placing interrupt-handling routines in on-chip ROM and the stack in on-chip RAM. Table 4-4. Number of States before Interrupt Service Number of states On-chip memory External memory 2*3 2*3 1 to 13 5 to 17*2 No. 1 2 Reason for wait Interrupt priority decision Wait for completion of current instruction*1 3 Save PC and CCR 4 12*2 4 Fetch vector 2 6*2 5 Fetch instruction 4 12*2 6 Internal processing 4 4 Total 17 to 29 41 to 53 *2 Notes: *1 These values do not apply if the current instruction is EEPMOV. *2 If wait states are inserted in external memory access, add the number of wait states. *3 1 for internal interrupts. 4.3.7 Precaution Note that the following type of contention can occur in interrupt handling. Contention between Interrupt Request and Disable: When software clears the enable bit of an interrupt to "0" to disable the interrupt, the interrupt becomes disabled after execution of the clearing instruction. If an enable bit is cleared by a BCLR or MOV instruction, for example, and the interrupt is requested during execution of that instruction, at the instant when the instruction ends the interrupt is still enabled, so after execution of the instruction, the hardware exceptionhandling sequence is executed for the interrupt. If a higher-priority interrupt is requested at the same time, however, the hardware exception-handling sequence is executed for the higher-priority interrupt and the interrupt that was disabled is ignored. Similar considerations apply when an interrupt request flag is cleared to "0." 72 Figure 4-7 shows an example in which the OCIAE bit is cleared to "0." CPU write cycle to TIER O Internal address bus TIER address OCIA interrupt handling Internal write signal OCIAE OCFA OCIA interrupt signal Figure 4-7. Contention between Interrupt and Disabling Instruction The above contention does not occur if the enable bit or flag is cleared to "0" while the interrupt mask bit (I) is set to "1." 4.4 Note on Stack Handling H161 H8/337 H.M '91 Fig. 4-7 In word access, the least significant bit of the address is always assumed to be 0. The stack is always accessed by word access. Care should be taken to keep an even value in the stack pointer (general register R7). Use the PUSH and POP (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP and MOV.W @SP+, Rn) instructions to push and pop registers on the stack. Setting the stack pointer to an odd value can cause programs to crash. Figure 4-8 shows an example of damage caused when the stack pointer contains an odd address. 73 PC H SP PC L SP R1 L PC L H'FECC H'FECD SP H'FECF BSR instruction MOV.B R1L, @-R7 H'FECF set in SP PC is improperly stored beyond top of stack PC H is lost PCH: PCL : R1 L : SP : Upper byte of program counter Lower byte of program counter General register Stack pointer Figure 4-8. Example of Damage Caused by Setting an Odd Address in R7 Although the CCR consists of only one byte, it is treated as word data when pushed on the stack. In the hardware interrupt exception-handling sequence, two identical CCR bytes are pushed onto Figure. 4-7 the stack to make a complete word. When popped from the stack by an RTE instruction, the CCR is loaded from the byte stored at the even address. The byte stored at the odd address is ignored. 74 Section 5. I/O Ports 5.1 Overview The H8/329 Series has seven parallel I/O ports, including: * Five 8-bit input/output ports--ports 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 * One 8-bit input port--port 7 * One 3-bit input/output port--port 5 Ports 1, 2, and 3 have programmable input pull-up transistors. Ports 1 to 6 can drive a Darlington pair. Ports 1 to 4, and 6 can drive one TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load. Port 5 can drive one TTL load and a 30pF capacitive load. Ports 1 and 2 can drive LEDs (10mA current sink). Input and output are memory-mapped. The CPU views each port as a data register (DR) located in the register field at the high end of the address space. Each port (except port 7) also has a data direction register (DDR) which determines which pins are used for input and which for output. Output: To send data to an output port, the CPU selects output in the data direction register and writes the desired data in the data register, causing the data to be held in a latch. The latch output drives the pin through a buffer amplifier. If the CPU reads the data register of an output port, it obtains the data held in the latch rather than the actual level of the pin. Input: To read data from an I/O port, the CPU selects input in the data direction register and reads the data register. This causes the input logic level at the pin to be placed directly on the internal data bus. There is no intervening input latch. The data direction registers are write-only registers; their contents are invisible to the CPU. If the CPU reads a data direction register all bits are read as "1," regardless of their true values. Care is required if bit manipulation instructions are used to set and clear the data direction bits. See the note on bit manipulation instructions in section 3.5.5, "Bit Manipulations." Auxiliary Functions: In addition to their general-purpose input/output functions, all of the I/O ports have auxiliary functions. Most of the auxiliary functions are software-selectable and must be enabled by setting bits in control registers. When selected, an auxiliary function usually replaces the general-purpose input/output function, but in some cases both functions can operate simultaneously. Table 5-1 summarizes the functions of the ports. 75 Table 5-1. Port Functions Expanded modes Mode 1 Mode 2 Address output General input (low) when DDR = "0" (initial state) Address output (low) when DDR = "1" Address output General input (high) when DDR = "0" (initial state) Address output (high) when DDR = "1" Data bus Data bus Single-chip mode Mode 3 General input/ output Port Description Pins Port 1 * 8-bit input-output P17 to P10/ port A7 to A0 * Can drive LEDs * Input pull-ups Port 2 * 8-bit input-output P27 to P20/ port A15 to A8 * Can drive LEDs * Input pull-ups General input/ output Port 3 * 8-bit input-output P37 to P30/ port D7 to D0 * Input pull-ups Port 4 * 8-bit input/output P47/WAIT P46/O General input/ output General input/ output General input when DDR = "0" (initial state) System clock output when DDR = "1" General input/ output WAIT input System clock output P45/AS P44/WR P43/RD P42/IRQ0 P41/IRQ1 P40/ADTRG/ IRQ2 Port 5 * 3-bit input-output P52 to P50 port Port 6 * 8-bit input-output P67 to P60 port Port 7 * 8-bit input port P77 to P70 AS output WR output RD output General input/output or external interrupt input (IRQ0, IRQ1) General input/output, A/D converter trigger input (ADTRG), or external interrupt input (IRQ2) General input/output or serial communication interface input/output (TxD, RxD, SCK) General input/output, 16-bit free-running timer input/output (FTCI, FTOA, FTOB, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID), or 8-bit timer 0/1 input/output (TMCI0, TMO0, TMRI0, TMCI1, TMO1, TMRI1) General input, or analog input to A/D converter 76 5.2 Port 1 Port 1 is an 8-bit input/output port that also provides the low bits of the address bus. The function of port 1 depends on the MCU mode as indicated in table 5-2. Table 5-2. Functions of Port 1 Mode 1 Address bus (Low) (A7 to A0) Mode 2 Input port or Address bus (Low) (A7 to A0)* Mode 3 Input/output port Note: * Depending on the bit settings in the data direction register: 0--input pin; 1--address pin Pins of port 1 can drive a single TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load when they are used as output pins. They can also drive light-emitting diodes and a Darlington pair. When they are used as input pins, they have programmable MOS transistor pull-ups. Table 5-3 details the port 1 registers. Table 5-3. Port 1 Registers Name Abbreviation Read/Write Port 1 data direction register P1DDR W Port 1 data register Port 1 input pull-up control register P1DR P1PCR R/W R/W Initial value H'FF (mode 1) H'00 (modes 2 and 3) H'00 H'00 Address H'FFB0 H'FFB2 H'FFAC Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)--H'FFB0 Bit Mode 1 Initial value Read/Write Modes 2 and 3 Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 77 P1DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 1. A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P1DDR is set to "1," and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to "0." Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)--H'FFB2 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P17 0 R/W 6 P16 0 R/W 5 P15 0 R/W 4 P14 0 R/W 3 P13 0 R/W 2 P12 0 R/W 1 P11 0 R/W 0 P10 0 R/W P1DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P17 to P10. When the CPU reads P1DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P1DR latch, but for input pins, it obtains the logic level directly from the pin, bypassing the P1DR latch. Port 1 Input Pull-Up Control Register (P1PCR)--H'FFAC Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17PCR P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P13PCR P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P1PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the input pull-up transistors in port 1. If a bit in P1DDR is cleared to "0" (designating input) and the corresponding bit in P1PCR is set to "1," the input pull-up transistor for that bit is turned on. Mode 1: In mode 1 (expanded mode without on-chip ROM), port 1 is automatically used for address output. The port 1 data direction register is unwritable. All bits in P1DDR are automatically set to "1" and cannot be cleared to "0." Mode 2: In mode 2 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM), the usage of port 1 can be selected on a pin-by-pin basis. A pin is used for general-purpose input if its data direction bit is cleared to "0," or for address output if its data direction bit is set to "1." Mode 3: In the single-chip mode port 1 is a general-purpose input/output port. 78 Reset: A reset clears P1DDR, P1DR, and P1PCR to all "0," placing all pins in the input state with the pull-up transistors off. In mode 1, when the chip comes out of reset, P1DDR is set to all "1." Hardware Standby Mode: All pins are placed in the high-impedance state with the pull-up transistors off. P1DR and P1PCR are initialized to H'00. In modes 2 and 3, P1DDR is initialized to H'00. Software Standby Mode: In the software standby mode, P1DDR, P1DR, and P1PCR remain in their previous state. Address output pins are Low. General-purpose output pins continue to output the data in P1DR. Input Pull-Up Transistors: Port 1 has built-in programmable input pull-up transistors that are available in modes 2 and 3. The pull-up for each bit can be turned on and off individually. To turn on an input pull-up in mode 2 or 3, set the corresponding P1PCR bit to "1" and clear the corresponding P1DDR bit to "0." P1PCR is cleared to H'00 by a reset and in the hardware standby mode, turning all input pull-ups off. In software standby mode, the previous state is maintained. Table 5-4 indicates the states of the input pull-up transistors in each operating mode. Table 5-4. States of Input Pull-Up Transistors (Port 1) Mode 1 2 3 Reset Off Off Off Hardware standby Off Off Off Software standby Off On/off On/off Other operating modes Off On/off On/off Notes: Off: The input pull-up transistor is always off. On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P1PCR = "1" and P1DDR = "0," but off otherwise. Figure 5-1 shows a schematic diagram of port 1. 79 Reset R Q D P1n PCR C RP1P Hardware standby WP1P Mode 1 Reset S R Q D P1n DDR * C Mode 3 WP1D Reset R Q D P1n DR C Mode 1 or 2 WP1 Internal data bus P1n RP1 WP1P: Write Port 1 PCR WP1D: Write Port 1 DDR WP1: Write Port 1 RP1P : Read Port 1 PCR Read Port 1 RP1: n = 0 to 7 Note: * Set-priority Figure 5-1. Port 1 Schematic Diagram 5.3 Port 2 Port 2 is an 8-bit input/output port that also provides the high bits of the address bus. The function of port 2 depends on the MCU mode as indicated in table 5-5. Table 5-5. Functions of Port 2 Mode 1 Address bus (High) (A15 to A8) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Input port or Input/output port Address bus (High) (A15 to A8)* Note: * Depending on the bit settings in the data direction register: 0--input pin; 1--address pin 80 Internal address bus Pins of port 2 can drive a single TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load when they are used as output pins. They can also drive light-emitting diodes and a Darlington pair. When they are used as input pins, they have programmable MOS transistor pull-ups. Table 5-6 details the port 2 registers. Table 5-6. Port 2 Registers Name Port 2 data direction register Port 2 data register Port 2 input pull-up control register Abbreviation P2DDR P2DR P2PCR Read/Write W R/W R/W Initial value H'FF (mode 1) H'00 (modes 2 and 3) H'00 H'00 Address H'FFB1 H'FFB3 H'FFAD Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR)--H'FFB1 Bit Mode 1 Initial value Read/Write Modes 2 and 3 Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W P2DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 2. A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P2DDR is set to "1," and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to "0." Port 2 Data Register (P2DR)--H'FFB3 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P27 0 R/W 6 P26 0 R/W 5 P25 0 R/W 4 P24 0 R/W 3 P23 0 R/W 2 P22 0 R/W 1 P21 0 R/W 0 P20 0 R/W P2DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P27 to P20. When the CPU reads P2DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P2DR latch, but for input pins, it obtains the logic level directly from the pin, bypassing the P2DR latch. 81 Port 2 Input Pull-Up Control Register (P2PCR)--H'FFAD Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P2PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the input pull-up transistors in port 2. If a bit in P2DDR is cleared to "0" (designating input) and the corresponding bit in P2PCR is set to "1," the input pull-up transistor for that bit is turned on. Mode 1: In mode 1 (expanded mode without on-chip ROM), port 2 is automatically used for address output. The port 2 data direction register is unwritable. All bits in P2DDR are automatically set to "1" and cannot be cleared to "0." Mode 2: In mode 2 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM), the usage of port 2 can be selected on a pin-by-pin basis. A pin is used for general-purpose input if its data direction bit is cleared to "0," or for address output if its data direction bit is set to "1." Mode 3: In the single-chip mode port 2 is a general-purpose input/output port. Reset: A reset clears P2DDR, P2DR, and P2PCR to all "0," placing all pins in the input state with the pull-up transistors off. In mode 1, when the chip comes out of reset, P2DDR is set to all "1." Hardware Standby Mode: All pins are placed in the high-impedance state with the pull-up transistors off. P2DR and P2PCR are initialized to H'00. In modes 2 and 3, P2DDR is initialized to H'00. Software Standby Mode: In the software standby mode, P2DDR, P2DR, and P2PCR remain in their previous state. Address output pins are Low. General-purpose output pins continue to output the data in P2DR. Input Pull-Up Transistors: Port 2 has built-in programmable input pull-up transistors that are available in modes 2 and 3. The pull-up for each bit can be turned on and off individually. To turn on an input pull-up in mode 2 or 3, set the corresponding P2PCR bit to "1" and clear the corresponding P2DDR bit to "0." P2PCR is cleared to H'00 by a reset and in the hardware standby mode, turning all input pull-ups off. In software standby mode, the previous state is maintained. 82 Table 5-7 indicates the states of the input pull-up transistors in each operating mode. Table 5-7. States of Input Pull-Up Transistors (Port 2) Mode 1 2 3 Reset Off Off Off Hardware standby Off Off Off Software standby Off On/off On/off Other operating modes Off On/off On/off Notes: Off: The input pull-up transistor is always off. On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P2PCR = "1" and P2DDR = "0," but off otherwise. Figure 5-2 shows a schematic diagram of port 2. Reset R Q D P2n PCR C RP2P Hardware standby WP2P Mode 1 Reset S R Q D P2n DDR * C Mode 3 WP2D Reset R Q D P2n DR C Mode 1 or 2 WP2 Internal data bus P2n RP2 WP2P: Write Port 2 PCR WP2D: Write Port 2 DDR WP2: Write Port 2 RP2P : Read Port 2 PCR Read Port 2 RP2: n = 0 to 7 Note: * Set-priority Figure 5-2. Port 2 Schematic Diagram 83 Internal address bus 5.4 Port 3 Port 3 is an 8-bit input/output port that also provides the external data bus. The function of port 3 depends on the MCU mode as indicated in table 5-8. Table 5-8. Functions of Port 3 Mode 1 Data bus Mode 2 Data bus Mode 3 Input/output port Pins of port 3 can drive a single TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load when they are used as output pins. They can also drive a Darlington pair. When they are used as input pins, they have programmable MOS transistor pull-ups. Table 5-9 details the port 3 registers. Table 5-9. Port 3 Registers Name Port 3 data direction register Port 3 data register Port 3 input pull-up control register Abbreviation P3DDR P3DR P3PCR Read/Write W R/W R/W Initial value H'00 H'00 H'00 Address H'FFB4 H'FFB6 H'FFAE Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR)--H'FFB4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W W W W W W W W P3DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 3. A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P3DDR is set to "1," and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to "0." 84 Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)--H'FFB6 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P37 0 R/W 6 P36 0 R/W 5 P35 0 R/W 4 P34 0 R/W 3 P33 0 R/W 2 P32 0 R/W 1 P31 0 R/W 0 P30 0 R/W P3DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P37 to P30. When the CPU reads P3DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P3DR latch, but for input pins, it obtains the logic level directly from the pin, bypassing the P3DR latch. Port 3 Input Pull-Up Control Register (P3PCR)--H'FFAE Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR P33PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P3PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the input pull-up transistors in port 3. If a bit in P3DDR is cleared to "0" (designating input) and the corresponding bit in P3PCR is set to "1," the input pull-up transistor for that bit is turned on. Modes 1 and 2: In the expanded modes, port 3 is automatically used as the data bus. The values in P3DDR, P3DR, and P3PCR are ignored. Mode 3: In the single-chip mode, port 3 can be used as a general-purpose input/output port. 85 Reset and Hardware Standby Mode: A reset or entry to the hardware standby mode clears P3DDR, P3DR, and P3PCR to all "0." All pins are placed in the high-impedance state with the pull-up transistors off. Software Standby Mode: In the software standby mode, P3DDR, P3DR, and P3PCR remain in their previous state. In modes 1 and 2, all pins are placed in the data input (high-impedance) state. In mode 3, all pins remain in their previous input or output state. Input Pull-Up Transistors: Port 3 has built-in programmable input pull-up transistors that are available in mode 3. The pull-up for each bit can be turned on and off individually. To turn on an input pull-up in mode 3, set the corresponding P3PCR bit to "1" and clear the corresponding P3DDR bit to "0." P3PCR is cleared to H'00 by a reset and in the hardware standby mode, turning all input pull-ups off. In software standby mode, the previous state is maintained. Table 5-10 indicates the states of the input pull-up transistors in each operating mode. Table 5-10. States of Input Pull-Up Transistors (Port 3) Mode 1 2 3 Reset Off Off Off Hardware standby Off Off Off Software standby Off Off On/off Other operating modes Off Off On/off Notes: Off: The input pull-up transistor is always off. On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P3PCR = "1" and P3DDR = "0," but off otherwise. Figure 5-3 shows a schematic diagram of port 3. 86 Mode 3 Reset R Q D P3n PCR C WP3P RP3P Mode 3 Reset R D Q P3n DDR C WP3D External address write Mode 3 Reset R Q D P3n DR C P3n Mode 1 or 2 WP3 RP3 External address read WP3P: Write Port 3 PCR WP3D: Write Port 3 DDR WP3: Write Port 3 RP3P : Read Port 3 PCR Read Port 3 RP3: n = 0 to 7 Figure 5-3. Port 3 Schematic Diagram H8/329 U.M. Fig. 5-3 87 Internal data bus 5.5 Port 4 Port 4 is an 8-bit input/output port that also provides pins for interrupt input (IRQ0 to IRQ2), A/D trigger input, system clock (O) output, and bus control signals (in the expanded modes). Pins P47 to P43 have different functions in different modes. Pins P42 to P40 have the same functions in all modes. Table 5-11 lists the pin functions. Table 5-11. Port 4 Pin Functions Pin P40 P41 P42 P43 P44 P45 P46 P47 Expanded modes Single-chip mode P40 input/output , IRQ2 input, and ADTRG input (simultaneously) P41 input/output and IRQ1 input (simultaneously) P42 input/output and IRQ0 input (simultaneously) RD output P43 input/output WR output P44 input/output AS output P45 input/output O output P46 input or O output WAIT input P47 input/output Pins of port 4 can drive a single TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load when they are used as output pins. Table 5-12 details the port 4 registers. Table 5-12. Port 4 Registers Name Port 4 data direction register Port 4 data register Abbreviation P4DDR P4DR Read/Write W R/W*1 Initial value Address H'40 (modes 1 and 2) H'FFB5 H'00 (mode 3) Undetermined*2 H'FFB7 Notes: *1 Bit 6 is read-only. *2 Bit 6 is undetermined. Other bits are initially "0." 88 Port 4 Data Direction Register (P4DDR)--H'FFB5 Bit Modes 1 and 2 Initial value Read/Write Mode 3 Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR 0 W 0 W 1 -- 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W P4DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 4. A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P4DDR is set to "1," and as in input pin if the bit is cleared to "0." Port 4 Data Register (P4DR)--H'FFB7 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P47 0 R/W 6 P46 * R 5 P45 0 R/W 4 P44 0 R/W 3 P43 0 R/W 2 P42 0 R/W 1 P41 0 R/W 0 P40 0 R/W Note: * Determined by the level at pin P46. P4DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P47 to P40. When the CPU reads P4DR, for output pins (P4DDR = "1") it reads the value in the P4DR latch, but for input pins (P4DDR = "0"), it obtains the logic level directly from the pin, bypassing the P4DR latch. This also applies to pins used for interrupt input, A/D trigger input, clock output, and control signal input or output. Pins P40, P41, and P42: Can be used for general-purpose input or output, interrupt request input, or A/D trigger input. See table 5-11. If a pin is used for interrupt or A/D trigger input, its data direction bit should be cleared to "0," so that the output from P4DR will not generate an interrupt request or A/D trigger signal. Pins P43, P44 and P45: In modes 1 and 2 (the expanded modes), these pins are used for output of the RD, WR, and AS bus control signals. They are unaffected by the values in P4DDR and P4DR. 89 In mode 3 (single-chip mode), these pins can be used for general-purpose input or output. Pin P46: In modes 1 and 2, this pin is used for system clock (O) output. In mode 3, this pin is used for general-purpose input if P46DDR is cleared to "0," or system clock output if P46DDR is set to "1." Pin P47: In modes 1 and 2, this pin is used for input of the WAIT bus control signal. It is unaffected by the values in P4DDR and P4DR. In mode 3 (single-chip mode), this pin can be used for general-purpose input or output. Reset: In the single-chip mode (mode 3), a reset initializes all pins of port 4 to the general-purpose input function. In the expanded modes (modes 1 and 2), P40 to P42 are initialized as input port pins, and P43 to P47 are initialized to their bus control and system clock output functions. Hardware Standby Mode: All pins are placed in the high-impedance state. 90 Software Standby Mode: All pins remain in their previous state. For RD, WR, AS, and O this means the High output state. Figures 5-4 to 5-8 show schematic diagrams of port 4. Reset R Q D P4. DDR 0 C WP4D Reset P40 R Q D P40 DR C WP4 RP4 A/D converter module ADTRG IRQ2 input WP4D: Write Port 4 DDR WP4: Write Port 4 RP4: Read Port 4 IRQ enable register IRQ2 enable Figure 5-4. Port 4 Schematic Diagram (Pin P40) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-4 91 Internal data bus Reset R Q D P4n DDR C WP4D Reset P4n R Q D P4n DR C WP4 RP4 WP4D: Write Port 4 DDR WP4: Write Port 4 Read Port 4 RP4: n = 1, 2 Figure 5-5. Port 4 Schematic Diagram (Pins P41 and P42) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-5 92 Internal data bus IRQ0 input IRQ1 input IRQ enable register IRQ0 enable IRQ1 enable Hardware standby Mode 1 or 2 Reset R Q D P4n DDR C P4 n R Q D P4n DR C Mode 1 or 2 WP4 Internal data bus Mode 3 WP4D Reset RD output WR output AS ouput RP4 WP4D: Write Port 4 DDR WP4: Write Port 4 Read Port 4 RP4: n = 3, 4, 5 Figure 5-6. Port 4 Schematic Diagram (Pins P43, P44 and P45) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-6 93 Hardware standby Mode 1, 2 Reset S R Q D P46 DDR * C WP4D Internal data bus P46 O RP9 WP4D: Write Port 4 DDR WP4: Write Port 4 Read Port 4 RP4: Note: * Set-priority Figure 5-7. Port 4 Schematic Diagram (Pin P46) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-7 94 Mode 1 or 2 Reset R Q D P47 DDR C WP4D Internal data bus WAIT input Reset P47 R Q D P47 DR C WP4 RP4 WP4D: Write Port 4 DDR WP4: Write Port 4 RP4: Read Port 4 Figure 5-8. Port 4 Schematic Diagram (Pin P47) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-8 95 5.6 Port 5 Port 5 is a 3-bit input/output port that also provides input and output pins for the serial communication interface (SCI). The pin functions depend on control bits in the serial control register (SCR). Pins not used for serial communication are available for general-purpose input/output. Table 5-13 lists the pin functions, which are the same in both the expanded and single-chip modes. Table 5-13. Port 5 Pin Functions (Modes 1 to 3) Usage I/O port Serial communication interface Pin functions P50 P51 TxD RxD P52 SCK See section 8, "Serial Communication Interface" for details of the serial control bits. Pins used by the serial communication interface are switched between input and output without regard to the values in the data direction register. Pins of port 5 can drive a single TTL load and a 30pF capacitive load when they are used as output pins. They can also drive a Darlington pair. Table 5-14 details the port 5 registers. Table 5-14. Port 5 Registers Name Port 5 data direction register Port 5 data register Abbreviation P5DDR P5DR Read/Write W R/W Initial value H'F8 H'F8 Address H'FFB8 H'FFBA Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR)--H'FFB8 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 1 0 P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR 0 0 0 W W W P5DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 5. A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P5DDR is set to "1," and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to "0." 96 Port 5 Data Register (P5DR)--H'FFBA Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 P52 0 R/W 1 P51 0 R/W 0 P50 0 R/W P5DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P52 to P50. When the CPU reads P5DR, for output pins (P5DDR = "1") it reads the value in the P5DR latch, but for input pins (P5DDR = "0"), it obtains the logic level directly from the pin, bypassing the P5DR latch. This also applies to pins used for serial communication. Pin P50: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, or for output of serial transmit data (TxD). When used for TxD output, this pin is unaffected by the values in P5DDR and P5DR. Pin P51: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, or for input of serial receive data (RxD). When used for RxD input, this pin is unaffected by P5DDR and P5DR. Pin P52: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, or for serial clock input or output (SCK). When used for SCK input or output, this pin is unaffected by P5DDR and P5DR. Reset and Hardware Standby Mode: A reset or entry to the hardware standby mode makes all pins of port 5 into input port pins. Software Standby Mode: In the software standby mode, the serial control register is initialized but P5DDR and P5DR remain in their previous states. All pins become input or output port pins depending on the setting of P5DDR. Output pins output the values in P5DR. Figures 5-9 to 5-11 show schematic diagrams of port 5. 97 Reset R Q D P50 DDR C WP5D Reset R Q D P50 DR C WP5 P50 Internal data bus SCI module Serial transmit enable Serial transmit data RP5 WP5D: Write Port 5 DDR WP5: Write Port 5 RP5: Read Port 5 Figure 5-9. Port 5 Schematic Diagram (Pin P50) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-9 98 Reset R Q D P51 DDR C WP5D Internal data bus Reset P51 R Q D P51 DR C WP5 SCI module Serial receive enable RP5 WP5D: Write Port 5 DDR WP5: Write Port 5 RP5: Read Port 5 Serial receive data Figure 5-10. Port 5 Schematic Diagram (Pin P51) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-10 99 Reset R Q D P52 DDR C WP5D Internal data bus Reset P52 R Q D P52 DR C WP5 SCI module Serial clock input enable Serial clock output enble Serial clock output enable RP5 Serial clock input WP5D: Write Port 5 DDR WP5: Write Port 5 RP5: Read Port 5 Figure 5-11. Port 5 Schematic Diagram (Pin P52) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-11 100 5.7 Port 6 Port 6 is an 8-bit input/output port that also provides input and output pins for the 16-bit freerunning timer and 8-bit timers. The pin functions depend on control bits in the control registers of the timers. Pins not used by the timers are available for general-purpose input/output. Table 5-15 lists the pin functions, which are the same in both the expanded and single-chip modes. Table 5-15. Port 6 Pin Functions (Modes 1 to 3) Usage I/O port 16-bit timer 8-bit timer Pin functions (Modes 1 to 3) P60 P61 P62 P63 FTCI FTOA TMCI0 -- FTIA -- P64 FTIB FTIC TMRI0 TMO0 P65 P66 P67 FTID FTOB -- TMCI1 TMRI1 TMO1 See section 6, "16-Bit Free-Running Timer," and section 7, "8-Bit Timers" for details of the timer control bits. Pins of port 6 can drive a single TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load when they are used as output pins. They can also drive a Darlington pair. Table 5-16 details the port 6 registers. Table 5-16. Port 6 Registers Name Port 6 data direction register Port 6 data register Abbreviation P6DDR P6DR Read/Write W R/W Initial value H'00 H'00 Address H'FFB9 H'FFBB Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR)--H'FFB9 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W W W W W W W W P6DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 6. A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P6DDR is set to "1," and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to "0." 101 Port 6 Data Register (P6DR)--H'FFBB Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P67 0 R/W 6 P66 0 R/W 5 P65 0 R/W 4 P64 0 R/W 3 P63 0 R/W 2 P62 0 R/W 1 P61 0 R/W 0 P60 0 R/W P6DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P67 to P60. When the CPU reads P6DR, for output pins (P6DDR = "1") it reads the value in the P6DR latch, but for input pins (P6DDR = "0"), it obtains the logic level directly from the pin, bypassing the P6DR latch. This also applies to pins used for timer input and output. Pin P60: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, and input of external clock signals to the 16-bit free-running timer and 8-bit timer 0. External clock input is selected by the CKS bits of the timers. When this pin is used for timer clock input, its P6DDR bit should normally be cleared to "0;" otherwise the timer will receive the value in P6DR. Pin P61: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, or for 16-bit free-running timer output (FTOA). When timer output is selected by the OEA bit of the 16-bit free-running timer, this pin is unaffected by the values in P6DDR and P6DR. Pin P62: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, and input of the FTIA input capture signal to the 16-bit free-running timer. FTIA input can operate simultaneously with general-purpose input or output. Pin P63: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, input of the FTIB input capture signal to the 16-bit free-running timer, and input of the timer reset signal to 8-bit timer 0. FTIB input operates simultaneously with the other functions. Reset signal input is selected by the CCLR bits of 8-bit timer 0. When this pin is used for timer reset signal input, its P6DDR bit should normally be cleared to "0;" otherwise the timer will receive the value in P6DR. Pin P64: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, input of the FTIC input capture signal to the 16-bit free-running timer, or output from 8-bit timer 0. FTIC input operates simultaneously with the other functions. When 8-bit timer output is selected by the OS bits of 8-bit timer 0, this pin is unaffected by the values in P6DDR and P6DR. 102 Pin P65: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, input of the FTID input capture signal to the 16-bit free-running timer, or input of an external clock signal to 8-bit timer 1. FTID input operates simultaneously with the other functions. When external clock input is selected by the CKS bits of 8-bit timer 1, the P6DDR bit of this pin should normally be cleared to "0," otherwise the timer will receive the value in P6DR. Pin P66: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, 16-bit free-running timer output (FTOB), and input of the timer reset signal to 8-bit timer 1. Reset signal input is selected by the CCLR bits of 8-bit timer 1, and can operate simultaneously with general-purpose input or output or 16-bit timer output. When 16-bit timer output is selected by the OEB bit of the 16-bit free-running timer, this pin is unaffected by the values in P6DDR and P6DR. Pin P67: This pin can be used for general-purpose input or output, or output from 8-bit timer 1. When 8-bit timer output is selected by the OS bits of 8-bit timer 1, this pin is unaffected by the values in P6DDR and P6DR. Reset and Hardware Standby Mode: A reset or entry to the hardware standby mode clears P6DDR and P6DR to all "0" and initializes the control registers of both the 8-bit and 16-bit timers. All pins become input port pins. Software Standby Mode: In the software standby mode, the control registers of the 8-bit and 16bit timers are initialized but P6DDR and P6DR remain in their previous states. All pins become input or output port pins depending on the setting of P6DDR. Output pins output the values in P6DR. Figures 5-12 to 5-18 show schematic diagrams of port 6. 103 Reset R Q D P60 DDR C WP6D Reset P60 R Q D P60 DR C WP6 RP6 Internal data bus Free-running timer module Counter clock input 8-bit timer module Counter clock input WP6D: Write Port 6 DDR WP6: Write Port 6 RP6: Read Port 6 Figure 5-12. Port 6 Schematic Diagram (Pin P60) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-12 104 Reset R Q D P61 DDR C WP6D Reset R Q D P6 1 DR C WP6 P61 Internal data bus Free-running timer module Output enable Output-compare output RP6 WP6D: Write Port 6 DDR WP6: Write Port 6 RP6: Read Port 6 Figure 5-13. Port 6 Schematic Diagram (Pin P61) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-13 105 Reset R Q D P62 DDR C WP6D Reset P62 R Q D P62 DR C WP6 RP6 Internal data bus Free-running timer module Input-capture input WP6D: Write Port 6 DDR WP6: Write Port 6 RP6: Read Port 6 Figure 5-14. Port 6 Schematic Diagram (Pin P62) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-14 106 Reset R Q D P6n DDR C WP6D Reset P6n R Q D P6n DR C WP6 RP6 Internal data bus Free-running timer module Input-capture input 8-bit timer module Counter clock input Counter reset input WP6D: Write Port 6 DDR WP6: Write Port 6 Read Port 6 RP6: n = 3, 5 Figure 5-15. Port 6 Schematic Diagram (Pins P63 and P65) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-15 107 Reset R Q D P64 DDR C WP6D Reset R Q D P6 4 DR C WP6 P64 Internal data bus 8-bit timer module Output enable 8-bit timer output RP6 Free-running timer module Input-capture input WP6D: Write Port 6 DDR WP6: Write Port 6 RP6: Read Port 6 Figure 5-16. Port 6 Schematic Diagram (Pin P64) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-16 108 Reset R Q D P66 DDR C WP6D Reset R Q D P6 6 DR C WP6 P66 Internal data bus Free-running timer module Output enable Output-compare output RP6 8-bit timer module Counter reset input WP6D: Write Port 6 DDR WP6: Write Port 6 RP6: Read Port 6 Figure 5-17. Port 6 Schematic Diagram (Pin P66) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-17 109 Reset R Q D P67 DDR C WP6D Reset R Q D P6 7 DR C WP6 P67 Internal data bus 8-bit timer module Output enable 8-bit timer output RP6 WP6D: Write Port 6 DDR WP6: Write Port 6 RP6: Read Port 6 Figure 5-18. Port 6 Schematic Diagram (Pin P67) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 5-18 110 5.8 Port 7 Port 7 is an 8-bit input port that also provides the analog input pins for the A/D converter module. The pin functions are the same in both the expanded and single-chip modes. Table 5-17 lists the pin functions. Table 5-18 describes the port 7 data register, which simply consists of connections of the port 7 pins to the internal data bus. Figure 5-19 shows a schematic diagram of port 7. Table 5-17. Port 7 Pin Functions (Modes 1 to 3) Usage I/O port Analog input Pin functions P71 P70 AN0 AN1 P72 AN2 P73 AN3 P74 AN4 P75 AN5 P76 AN6 P77 AN7 Table 5-18. Port 7 Register Name Port 7 data register Abbreviation P7DR Read/Write R Initial value Undetermined Address H'FFBE Port 7 Data Register (P7DR)--H'FFBE Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P77 * R 6 P76 * R 5 P75 * R 4 P74 * R 3 P73 * R 2 P72 * R 1 P71 * R 0 P70 * R Note: * Depends on the levels of pins P77 to P70. Internal data bus RP7 P7n A/D converter module Analog input RP7: Read port 7 n = 0 to 7 Figure 5-19. Port 7 Schematic Diagram 111 Section 6. 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 6.1 Overview The H8/329 Series has an on-chip 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) module that uses a 16-bit freerunning counter as a time base. Applications of the FRT module include rectangular-wave output (up to two independent waveforms), input pulse width measurement, and measurement of external clock periods. 6.1.1 Features The features of the free-running timer module are listed below. * Selection of four clock sources The free-running counter can be driven by an internal clock source (O/2, O/8, or O/32), or an external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter). * Two independent comparators Each comparator can generate an independent waveform. * Four input capture channels The current count can be captured on the rising or falling edge (selectable) of an input signal. The four input capture registers can be used separately, or in a buffer mode. * Counter can be cleared under program control The free-running counters can be cleared on compare-match A. * Seven independent interrupts Compare-match A and B, input capture A to D, and overflow interrupts are requested independently. 113 6.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 6-1 shows a block diagram of the free-running timer. Internal clock sources O/2 O/8 O/32 Clock Comparematch A OCRA (H/L) External clock source FTCI Clock select Comparator A FTOA FTOB Overflow Clear Bus interface FRC (H/L) Internal data bus Comparematch B Comparator B OCRB (H/L) Control logic FTIA FTIB FTIC FTID TCSR TIER TCR TOCR ICIA ICIB ICIC ICID OCIA OCIB FOVI FRC: OCRA, B: ICRA, B, C, D: TCSR: Capture ICRA (H/L) ICRB (H/L) ICRC (H/L) ICRD (H/L) Interrupt signals Free-Running Counter (16 bits) Output Compare Register A, B (16 bits) Input Capture Register A, B, C, D (16 bits) Timer Control/Status Register (8 bits) TIER: Timer Interrupt Enable Register (8 bits) TCR: Timer Control Register (8 bits) TOCR: Timer Output Compare Control Register (8 bits) Figure 6-1. Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 114 Module data bus 6.1.3 Input and Output Pins Table 6-1 lists the input and output pins of the free-running timer module. Table 6-1. Input and Output Pins of Free-Running Timer Module Name Counter clock input Output compare A Output compare B Input capture A Input capture B Input capture C Input capture D Abbreviation FTCI FTOA FTOB FTIA FTIB FTIC FTID I/O Input Output Output Input Input Input Input Function Input of external free-running counter clock signal Output controlled by comparator A Output controlled by comparator B Trigger for capturing current count into input capture register A Trigger for capturing current count into input capture register B Trigger for capturing current count into input capture register C Trigger for capturing current count into input capture register D 6.1.4 Register Configuration Table 6-2 lists the registers of the free-running timer module. Table 6-2. Register Configuration Initial value H'01 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'E0 H'00 H'00 Name Timer interrupt enable register Timer control/status register Free-running counter (High) Free-running counter (Low) Output compare register A/B (High)*2 Output compare register A/B (Low)*2 Timer control register Timer output compare control register Input capture register A (High) Input capture register A (Low) Abbreviation TIER TCSR FRC (H) FRC (L) OCRA/B (H) OCRA/B (L) TCR TOCR ICRA (H) ICRA (L) R/W R/W R/(W)*1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R Address H'FF90 H'FF91 H'FF92 H'FF93 H'FF94*2 H'FF95*2 H'FF96 H'FF97 H'FF98 H'FF99 Notes: *1 Software can write a "0" to clear bits 7 to 1, but cannot write a "1" in these bits. *2 OCRA and OCRB share the same addresses. Access is controlled by the OCRS bit in TOCR. 115 Table 6-2. Register Configuration (cont.) Initial value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 Name Input capture register B (High) Input capture register B (Low) Input capture register C (High) Input capture register C (Low) Input capture register D (High) Input capture register D (Low) Abbreviation ICRB (H) ICRB (L) ICRC (H) ICRC (L) ICRD (H) ICRD (L) R/W R R R R R R Address H'FF9A H'FF9B H'FF9C H'FF9D H'FF9E H'FF9F 6.2 Register Descriptions 6.2.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC)--H'FF92 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 value Read/ R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Write The FRC is a 16-bit readable/writable up-counter that increments on an internal pulse generated from a clock source. The clock source is selected by the clock select 1 and 0 bits (CKS1 and CKS0) of the timer control register (TCR). When the FRC overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to "1." Because the FRC is a 16-bit register, a temporary register (TEMP) is used when the FRC is written or read. See section 6.3, "CPU Interface," for details. The FRC is initialized to H'0000 at a reset and in the standby modes. It can also be cleared by compare-match A. 116 6.2.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB)--H'FF94 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 value Read/ R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Write OCRA and OCRB are 16-bit readable/writable registers, the contents of which are continually compared with the value in the FRC. When a match is detected, the corresponding output compare flag (OCFA or OCFB) is set in the timer control/status register (TCSR). In addition, if the output enable bit (OEA or OEB) in the timer output compare control register (TOCR) is set to "1," when the output compare register and FRC values match, the logic level selected by the output level bit (OLVLA or OLVLB) in the TOCR is output at the output compare pin (FTOA or FTOB). OCRA and OCRB share the same address. They are differentiated by the OCRS bit in the TOCR. A temporary register (TEMP) is used for write access, as explained in section 6.3, "CPU Interface." OCRA and OCRB are initialized to H'FFFF at a reset and in the standby modes. 6.2.3 Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD)--H'FF98, H'FF9A, H'FF9C, H'FF9E Bit 15 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R Initial 0 value Read/ R Write Each input capture register is a 16-bit read-only register. When the rising or falling edge of the signal at an input capture pin (FTIA to FTID) is detected, the current value of the FRC is copied to the corresponding input capture register (ICRA to ICRD).* At the same time, the corresponding input capture flag (ICFA to ICFD) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to "1." The input capture edge is selected by the input edge select bits (IEDGA to IEDGD) in the timer control register (TCR). 117 Note: * The FRC contents are transferred to the input capture register regardless of the value of the input capture flag (ICFA/B/C/D). Input capture can be buffered by using the input capture registers in pairs. When the BUFEA bit in the timer control register (TCR) is set to "1," ICRC is used as a buffer register for ICRA as shown in figure 6-2. When an FTIA input is received, the old ICRA contents are moved into ICRC, and the new FRC count is copied into ICRA. BUFEA IEDGA IEDGC FTIA Edge detect and capture signal generating circuit ICRC BUFEA: IEDGA: IEDGC: ICRC: ICRA: FRC: Buffer Enable A Input Edge Select A Input Edge Select C Input Capture Register C Input Capture Register A Free-Running Counter ICRA FRC Figure 6-2. Input Capture Buffering Similarly, when the BUFEB bit in TIER is set to "1," ICRD is used as a buffer register for ICRB. When input capture is buffered, if the two input edge bits are set to different values (IEDGA IEDGC or IEDGB IEDGD), then input capture is triggered on both the rising and falling edges of the FTIA or FTIB input signal. If the two input edge bits are set to the same value (IEDGA = IEDGC or IEDGB = IEDGD), then input capture is triggered on only one edge. Fig. 6-2 118 Table 6-3. Buffered Input Capture Edge Selection (Example) IEDGA 0 0 1 1 IEDGC 0 1 0 1 Input Capture Edge Captured on falling edge of input capture A (FTIA) (Initial value) Captured on both rising and falling edges of input capture A (FTIA) Captured on rising edge of input capture A (FTIA) Because the input capture registers are 16-bit registers, a temporary register (TEMP) is used when they are read. See section 6.3, "CPU Interface," for details. To ensure input capture, the width of the input capture pulse (FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID) should be at least 1.5 system clock periods (1.5*O). When triggering is enabled on both edges, the input capture pulse width should be at least 2.5 system clock periods. O FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, or FTID Figure 6-3. Minimum Input Capture Pulse Width 119 The input capture registers are initialized to H'0000 at a reset and in the standby modes. Note: When input capture is detected, the FRC value is transferred to the input capture register even if the input capture flag is already set. 6.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)--H'FF90 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ICIAE 0 R/W 6 ICIBE 0 R/W 5 ICICE 0 R/W 4 ICIDE 0 R/W 3 2 OCIAE OCIBE 0 0 R/W R/W 1 OVIE 0 R/W 0 -- 1 -- The TIER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables and disables interrupts. The TIER is initialized to H'01 (all interrupts disabled) at a reset and in the standby modes. Bit 7--Input Capture Interrupt A Enable (ICIAE): This bit selects whether to request input capture interrupt A (ICIA) when input capture flag A (ICFA) in the timer status/control register (TCSR) is set to "1." Bit 7 ICIAE 0 1 Description Input capture interrupt request A (ICIA) is disabled. Input capture interrupt request A (ICIA) is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 6--Input Capture Interrupt B Enable (ICIBE): This bit selects whether to request input capture interrupt B (ICIB) when input capture flag B (ICFB) in the timer status/control register (TCSR) is set to "1." Bit 6 ICIBE 0 1 Description Input capture interrupt request B (ICIB) is disabled. Input capture interrupt request B (ICIB) is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 5--Input Capture Interrupt C Enable (ICICE): This bit selects whether to request input capture interrupt C (ICIC) when input capture flag C (ICFC) in the timer status/control register (TCSR) is set to "1." 120 Bit 5 ICICE 0 1 Description Input capture interrupt request C (ICIC) is disabled. Input capture interrupt request C (ICIC) is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 4--Input Capture Interrupt D Enable (ICIDE): This bit selects whether to request input capture interrupt D (ICID) when input capture flag D (ICFD) in the timer status/control register (TCSR) is set to "1." Bit 4 ICIDE 0 1 Description Input capture interrupt request D (ICID) is disabled. Input capture interrupt request D (ICID) is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 3--Output Compare Interrupt A Enable (OCIAE): This bit selects whether to request output compare interrupt A (OCIA) when output compare flag A (OCFA) in the timer status/control register (TCSR) is set to "1." Bit 3 OCIAE 0 1 Description Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is disabled. Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 2--Output Compare Interrupt B Enable (OCIBE): This bit selects whether to request output compare interrupt B (OCIB) when output compare flag B (OCFB) in the timer status/control register (TCSR) is set to "1." Bit 2 OCIBE 0 1 Description Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is disabled. Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 1--Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): This bit selects whether to request a freerunning timer overflow interrupt (FOVI) when the timer overflow flag (OVF) in the timer status/control register (TCSR) is set to "1." 121 Bit 1 OVIE 0 1 Description Timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is disabled. Timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 0--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as "1." 6.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)--H'FF91 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ICFA ICFB ICFC ICFD OCFA OCFB OVF CCLRA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/W The TCSR is an 8-bit readable and partially writable* register that contains the seven interrupt flags and specifies whether to clear the counter on compare-match A (when the FRC and OCRA values match). Note: * Software can write a "0" in bits 7 to 1 to clear the flags, but cannot write a "1" in these bits. The TCSR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes. Bit 7--Input Capture Flag A (ICFA): This status bit is set to "1" to flag an input capture A event. If BUFEA = "0," ICFA indicates that the FRC value has been copied to ICRA. If BUFEA = "1," ICFA indicates that the old ICRA value has been moved into ICRC and the new FRC value has been copied to ICRA. ICFA must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 7 ICFA 0 1 Description To clear ICFA, the CPU must read ICFA after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 when an FTIA input signal causes the FRC value to be copied to ICRA. (Initial value) 122 Bit 6--Input Capture Flag B (ICFB): This status bit is set to "1" to flag an input capture B event. If BUFEB = "0," ICFB indicates that the FRC value has been copied to ICRB. If BUFEB = "1," ICFB indicates that the old ICRB value has been moved into ICRC and the new FRC value has been copied to ICRB. ICFB must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 6 ICFB 0 1 Description To clear ICFB, the CPU must read ICFB after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 when an FTIB input signal causes the FRC value to be copied to ICRB. (Initial value) Bit 5--Input Capture Flag C (ICFC): This status bit is set to "1" to flag input of a rising or falling edge of FTIC as selected by the IEDGC bit. When BUFEA = "0," this indicates capture of the FRC count in ICRC. When BUFEA = "1," however, the FRC count is not captured, so ICFC becomes simply an external interrupt flag. In other words, the buffer mode frees FTIC for use as a general-purpose interrupt signal (which can be enabled or disabled by the ICICE bit). ICFC must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 5 ICFC 0 1 Description To clear ICFC, the CPU must read ICFC after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 when an FTIC input signal is received. (Initial value) Bit 4--Input Capture Flag D (ICFD): This status bit is set to "1" to flag input of a rising or falling edge of FTID as selected by the IEDGD bit. When BUFEB = "0," this indicates capture of the FRC count in ICRD. When BUFEB = "1," however, the FRC count is not captured, so ICFD becomes simply an external interrupt flag. In other words, the buffer mode frees FTID for use as a general-purpose interrupt signal (which can be enabled or disabled by the ICIDE bit). ICFD must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. 123 Bit 4 ICFD 0 1 Description To clear ICFD, the CPU must read ICFD after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 when an FTID input signal is received. (Initial value) Bit 3--Output Compare Flag A (OCFA): This status flag is set to "1" when the FRC value matches the OCRA value. This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 3 OCFA 0 1 Description To clear OCFA, the CPU must read OCFA after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 when FRC = OCRA. (Initial value) Bit 2--Output Compare Flag B (OCFB): This status flag is set to "1" when the FRC value matches the OCRB value. This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 2 OCFB 0 1 Description To clear OCFB, the CPU must read OCFB after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 when FRC = OCRB. (Initial value) Bit 1--Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag is set to "1" when the FRC overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000). This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 1 OVF 0 1 Description To clear OVF, the CPU must read OVF after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 when FRC changes from H'FFFF to H'0000. (Initial value) 124 Bit 0--Counter Clear A (CCLRA): This bit selects whether to clear the FRC at compare-match A (when the FRC and OCRA values match). Bit 0 CCLRA Description 0 The FRC is not cleared. 1 The FRC is cleared at compare-match A. 6.2.6 Timer Control Register (TCR)--H'FF96 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 IEDGA IEDGB IEDGC IEDGD BUFEA BUFEB 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W (Initial value) The TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture signals, enables the input capture buffer mode, and selects the FRC clock source. The TCR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes. Bit 7--Input Edge Select A (IEDGA): This bit causes input capture A events to be recognized on the selected edge of the input capture A signal (FTIA). Bit 7 IEDGA 0 1 Description Input capture A events are recognized on the falling edge of FTIA. Input capture A events are recognized on the rising edge of FTIA. (Initial value) Bit 6--Input Edge Select B (IEDGB): This bit causes input capture B events to be recognized on the selected edge of the input capture B signal (FTIB). Bit 6 IEDGB 0 1 Description Input capture B events are recognized on the falling edge of FTIB. Input capture B events are recognized on the rising edge of FTIB. (Initial value) 125 Bit 5--Input Edge Select C (IEDGC): This bit causes input capture C events to be recognized on the selected edge of the input capture C signal (FTIC). Bit 5 IEDGC 0 1 Description Input capture C events are recognized on the falling edge of FTIC. Input capture C events are recognized on the rising edge of FTIC. (Initial value) Bit 4--Input Edge Select D (IEDGD): This bit causes input capture D events to be recognized on the selected edge of the input capture D signal (FTID). Bit 4 IEDGD 0 1 Description Input capture D events are recognized on the falling edge of FTID. Input capture D events are recognized on the rising edge of FTID. (Initial value) Bit 3--Buffer Enable A (BUFEA): This bit selects whether to use ICRC as a buffer register for ICRA. Bit 3 BUFEA 0 1 Description ICRC is used for input capture C. (Initial value) ICRC is used as a buffer register for input capture A. Input C is not captured. Bit 2--Buffer Enable B (BUFEB): This bit selects whether to use ICRD as a buffer register for ICRB. Bit 2 BUFEB 0 1 Description ICRD is used for input capture D. (Initial value) ICRD is used as a buffer register for input capture B. Input D is not captured. Bits 1 and 0--Clock Select (CKS1 and CKS0): These bits select external clock input or one of three internal clock sources for the FRC. External clock pulses are counted on the rising edge. 126 Bit 1 CKS1 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 0 1 Description O/2 Internal clock source O/8 Internal clock source O/32 Internal clock source External clock source (rising edge) (Initial value) 6.2.7 Timer Output Compare Control Register (TOCR)--H'FF97 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 OCRS 0 R/W 3 OEA 0 R/W 2 OEB 0 R/W 1 0 OLVLA OLVLB 0 0 R/W R/W The TOCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the output compare function. The TOCR is initialized to H'E0 at a reset and in the standby modes. Bits 7 to 5--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as "1." Bit 4--Output Compare Register Select (OCRS): When the CPU accesses addresses H'FF94 and H'FF95, this bit directs the access to either OCRA or OCRB. These two registers share the same addresses as follows: Upper byte of OCRA and upper byte of OCRB: H'FF94 Lower byte of OCRA and lower byte of OCRB: H'FF95 Bit 4 OCRS 0 1 Description The CPU can access OCRA. The CPU can access OCRB. (Initial value) Bit 3--Output Enable A (OEA): This bit enables or disables output of the output compare A signal (FTOA). Bit 3 OEA 0 1 Description Output compare A output is disabled. Output compare A output is enabled. (Initial value) 127 Bit 2--Output Enable B (OEB): This bit enables or disables output of the output compare B signal (FTOB). Bit 2 OEB Description 0 Output compare B output is disabled. 1 Output compare B output is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 1--Output Level A (OLVLA): This bit selects the logic level to be output at the FTOA pin when the FRC and OCRA values match. Bit 1 OLVLA 0 1 Description A "0" logic level (Low) is output for compare-match A. A "1" logic level (High) is output for compare-match A. (Initial value) Bit 0--Output Level B (OLVLB): This bit selects the logic level to be output at the FTOB pin when the FRC and OCRB values match. Bit 0 OLVLB 0 1 Description A "0" logic level (Low) is output for compare-match B. A "1" logic level (High) is output for compare-match B. (Initial value) 6.3 CPU Interface The free-running counter (FRC), output compare registers (OCRA and OCRB), and input capture registers (ICRA to ICRD) are 16-bit registers, but they are connected to an 8-bit data bus. When the CPU accesses these registers, to ensure that both bytes are written or read simultaneously, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP). These registers are written and read as follows: * Register Write When the CPU writes to the upper byte, the byte of write data is placed in TEMP. Next, when the CPU writes to the lower byte, this byte of data is combined with the byte in TEMP and all 16 bits are written in the register simultaneously. 128 * Register Read When the CPU reads the upper byte, the upper byte of data is sent to the CPU and the lower byte is placed in TEMP. When the CPU reads the lower byte, it receives the value in TEMP. (As an exception, when the CPU reads OCRA or OCRB, it reads both the upper and lower bytes directly, without using TEMP.) Programs that access these registers should normally use word access. Equivalently, they may access first the upper byte, then the lower byte by two consecutive byte accesses. Data will not be transferred correctly if the bytes are accessed in reverse order, or if only one byte is accessed. Coding Examples To write the contents of general register R0 to OCRA: To transfer the contents of ICRA to general register R0: MOV.W MOV.W R0, @OCRA @ICRA, R0 Figure 6-4 shows the data flow when the FRC is accessed. The other registers are accessed in the same way. (1) Upper byte write CPU writes data H'AA Module data bus Bus interface TEMP [H'AA] FRC H [ ] (2) Lower byte write FRC L [ ] CPU writes data H'55 Module data bus Bus interface TEMP [H'AA] FRC H [H'AA] FRC L [H'55] Figure 6-4 (a). Write Access to FRC (when CPU Writes H'AA55) 129 H8/329 U.M. '92 (1) Upper byte read CPU reads data H'AA Module data bus Bus interface TEMP [H'55] FRC H [H'AA] (2) Lower byte read FRC L [H'55] CPU reads data H'55 Module data bus Bus interface TEMP [H'55] FRC H [ ] FRC L [ ] Figure 6-4 (b). Read Access to FRC (when FRC Contains H'AA55) 6.4 Operation 6.4.1 FRC Incrementation Timing H8/329 U.M Fig. 6-4 (b) The FRC increments on a pulse generated once for each period of the selected (internal or external) clock source. The clock source is selected by bits CKS0 and CKS1 in the TCR. Internal Clock: The internal clock sources (O/2, O/8, O/32) are created from the system clock (O) by a prescaler. The FRC increments on a pulse generated from the falling edge of the prescaler output. See figure 6-5. 130 O Internal clock FRC clock pulse FRC N -1 N N+1 Figure 6-5. Increment Timing for Internal Clock Source External Clock: If external clock input is selected, the FRC increments on the rising edge of the FTCI clock signal. Figure 6-6 shows the increment timing. The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clock (O) periods. The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than 1.5 system clock periods. Fig. 6-5 O FTCI FRC clock pulse FRC N N+1 Figure 6-6. Increment Timing for External Clock Source O FTCI Figure 6-7. Minimum External Clock Pulse Width 131 6.4.2 Output Compare Timing (1) Setting of Output Compare Flags A and B (OCFA and OCFB): The output compare flags are set to "1" by an internal compare-match signal generated when the FRC value matches the OCRA or OCRB value. This compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which the two values match, just before the FRC increments to a new value. Accordingly, when the FRC and OCR values match, the compare-match signal is not generated until the next period of the clock source. Figure 6-8 shows the timing of the setting of the output compare flags. O FRC N N+1 OCRA or OCRB OCR N Internal comparematch signal OCFA or OCFB Figure 6-8. Setting of Output Compare Flags 132 (2) Output Timing: When a compare-match occurs, the logic level selected by the output level bit (OLVLA or OLVLB) in TOCR is output at the output compare pin (FTOA or FTOB). Figure 6-9 shows the timing of this operation for compare-match A. O FRC N N+1 N N+1 OCRA N N Internal comparematch A signal Clear* OLVLA FTOA Note: * Cleared by software Figure 6-9. Timing of Output Compare A (3) FRC Clear Timing: If the CCLRA bit in the TCSR is set to "1," the FRC is cleared when compare-match A occurs. Figure 6-10 shows the timing of this operation. Figure 6-9 O Internal comparematch A signal FRC N H'0000 Figure 6-10. Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A 6.4.3 Input Capture Timing (1) Input Capture Timing: An internal input capture signal is generated from the rising or falling edge of the signal at the input capture pin FTIx (x = A, B, C, D), as selected by the corresponding IEDGx bit in TCR. Figure 6-11 shows the usual input capture timing when the rising edge is selected (IEDGx = "1"). Fig. 6-10 133 O Input at FTI pin Internal input capture signal Figure 6-11. Input Capture Timing (Usual Case) If the upper byte of ICRx is being read when the input capture signal arrives, the internal input capture signal is delayed by one state. Figure 6-12 shows the timing for this case. Read cycle: CPU reads upper byte of ICR T1 T2 T3 O Input at FTI pin Internal input capture signal Figure 6-12. Input Capture Timing (1-State Delay) In buffer mode, this delay occurs if the CPU is reading either of the two registers concerned. When ICRA and ICRC are used in buffer mode, for example, if the upper byte of either ICRA or ICRC is being read when the FTIA input arrives, the internal input capture signal is delayed by one state. Figure Figure 6-13 shows the timing for this case. The case of ICRB and ICRD is similar. 6-13 Read cycle: CPU reads upper byte of ICRA or ICRC T1 T2 T3 O Input at FTIA pin Internal input capture signal Figure 6-13. Input Capture Timing (1-State Delay, Buffer Mode) 134 Figure 6-14 Figure 6-14 shows how input capture operates when ICRA and ICRC are used in buffer mode and IEDGA and IEDGC are set to different values (IEDGA = 0 and IEDGC = 1, or IEDGA = 1 and IEDGC = 0), so that input capture is performed on both the rising and falling edges of FTIA. O FTIA Internal input capture signal FRC n n+1 N N+1 ICRA M n n N ICRC m M M n Figure 6-14. Buffered Input Capture with Both Edges Selected Figure 6-14 In this mode, FTIC does not cause the FRC contents to be copied to ICRC. However, input capture flag C still sets on the edge of FTIC selected by IEDGC, and if the interrupt enable bit (ICICE) is set, a CPU interrupt is requested. The situation when ICRB and ICRD are used in buffer mode is similar. 135 (2) Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting: The input capture flag ICFx (x = A, B, C, D) is set to "1" by the internal input capture signal. Figure 6-15 shows the timing of this operation. O Internal input capture signal ICFA/B/C/D FRC N ICRA/B/C/D N Figure 6-15. Setting of Input Capture Flag 6.4.4 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF) Figure 6-15 The FRC overflow flag (OVF) is set to "1" when the FRC overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000). Figure 6-16 shows the timing of this operation. O FRC H'FFFF H'0000 Internal overflow signal OVF Figure 6-16. Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) 136 6.5 Interrupts The free-running timer can request seven types of interrupts: input capture A to D (ICIA, ICIB, ICIC, ICID), output compare A and B (OCIA and OCIB), and overflow (FOVI). Each interrupt is requested when the corresponding enable and flag bits are set. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each type of interrupt. Table 6-4 lists information about these interrupts. Table 6-4. Free-Running Timer Interrupts Interrupt ICIA ICIB ICIC ICID OCIA OCIB FOVI Description Requested when ICFA and ICIAE are set Requested when ICFB and ICIBE are set Requested when ICFC and ICICE are set Requested when ICFD and ICIDE are set Requested when OCFA and OCIAE are set Requested when OCFB and OCIBE are set Requested when OVF and OVIE are set Priority High Low 6.6 Sample Application In the example below, the free-running timer is used to generate two square-wave outputs with a 50% duty cycle and arbitrary phase relationship. The programming is as follows: (1) The CCLRA bit in the TCSR is set to "1." (2) Each time a compare-match interrupt occurs, software inverts the corresponding output level bit in TOCR (OLVLA or OLVLB). FRC Clear counter H'FFFF OCRA OCRB H'0000 FTOA FTOB Figure 6-17. Square-Wave Output (Example) 137 6.7 Application Notes Application programmers should note that the following types of contention can occur in the freerunning timers. (1) Contention between FRC Write and Clear: If an internal counter clear signal is generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of the free-running counter, the clear signal takes priority and the write is not performed. Figure 6-18 shows this type of contention. Write cycle: CPU write to lower byte of FRC T1 T2 T3 O Internal address bus FRC address Internal write signal FRC clear signal FRC N H'0000 Figure 6-18. FRC Write-Clear Contention Figure 6-21 138 (2) Contention between FRC Write and Increment: If an FRC increment pulse is generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of the free-running counter, the write takes priority and the FRC is not incremented. Figure 6-19 shows this type of contention. Write cycle: CPU write to lower byte of FRC T1 T2 T3 O Internal address bus FRC address Internal write signal FRC clock pulse FRC N M Write data Figure 6-19. FRC Write-Increment Contention Figure 6-22 139 (3) Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match: If a compare-match occurs during the T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of OCRA or OCRB, the write takes priority and the compare-match signal is inhibited. Figure 6-20 shows this type of contention. Write cycle: CPU write to lower byte of OCRA or OCRB T1 T2 T3 O Internal address bus OCR address Internal write signal FRC N N+1 OCRA or OCRB N Write data M Compare-match A or B signal Inhibited Figure 6-20. Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match 140 (4) Incrementation Caused by Changing of Internal Clock Source: When an internal clock source is changed, the changeover may cause the FRC to increment. This depends on the time at which the clock select bits (CKS1 and CKS0) are rewritten, as shown in table 6-5. The pulse that increments the FRC is generated at the falling edge of the internal clock source. If clock sources are changed when the old source is High and the new source is Low, as in case No. 3 in table 6-5, the changeover generates a falling edge that triggers the FRC increment clock pulse. Switching between an internal and external clock source can also cause the FRC to increment. Table 6-5. Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources No. Description Low Low: CKS1 and CKS0 are rewritten while both clock sources are Low. Timing chart Old clock source 1 New clock source FRC clock pulse FRC N N +1 CKS rewrite 2 Low High: CKS1 and CKS0 are rewritten while old clock source is Low and new clock source is High. Old clock source New clock source FRC clock pulse FRC N N +1 N +2 CKS rewrite 141 Table 6-5. Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources (cont.) No. Description High Low: CKS1 and CKS0 are rewritten while old clock source is High and new clock source is Low. Timing chart Old clock source 3 New clock source * FRC clock pulse FRC N N +1 N +2 CKS rewrite 4 High High: CKS1 and CKS0 are rewritten while both clock sources are High. Old clock source Figure 6-4-3 New clock source FRC clock pulse FRC N N +1 N+2 CKS rewrite Note: * The switching of clock sources is regarded as a falling edge that increments the FRC. 142 Section 7. 8-Bit Timers 7.1 Overview The H8/329 Series includes an 8-bit timer module with two channels (TMR0 and TMR1). Each channel has an 8-bit counter (TCNT) and two time constant registers (TCORA and TCORB) that are constantly compared with the TCNT value to detect compare-match events. One application of the 8-bit timer module is to generate a rectangular-wave output with an arbitrary duty cycle. 7.1.1 Features The features of the 8-bit timer module are listed below. * Selection of seven clock sources The counters can be driven by one of six internal clock signals or an external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter). * Selection of three ways to clear the counters The counters can be cleared on compare-match A or B, or by an external reset signal. * Timer output controlled by two time constants The timer output signal in each channel is controlled by two independent time constants, enabling the timer to generate output waveforms with an arbitrary duty factor. * Three independent interrupts Compare-match A and B and overflow interrupts can be requested independently. 7.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 7-1 shows a block diagram of one channel in the 8-bit timer module. The other channel is identical. 143 External clock source TMCI Internal clock sources Channel 0 O/2 O/8 O/32 O/64 O/256 O/1024 Clock Channel 1 O/2 O/8 O/64 O/128 O/1024 O/2048 Clock select TCORA Compare-match A Comparator A TMO TMRI Clear Comparator B Control logic Compare-match B TCORB Overflow Module data bus TCNT Internal data bus TCSR TCR CMIA CMIB OVI Interrupt signals TCR: TCSR: TCORA: TCORB: TCNT: Timer Control Register (8 bits) Timer Control Status Register (8 bits) Time Constant Register A (8 bits) Time Constant Register B (8 bits) Timer Counter Figure 7-1. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer 7.1.3 Input and Output Pins Table 7-1 lists the input and output pins of the 8-bit timer. Table 7-1. Input and Output Pins of 8-Bit Timer Abbreviation TMR0 TMR1 TMO1 TMO0 TMCI1 TMCI0 TMRI1 TMRI0 H161 H8/337 H.M '91 Fig. 7-1 Name Timer output Timer clock input Timer reset input I/O Output Input Input Function Output controlled by compare-match External clock source for the counter External reset signal for the counter 144 Bus interface 7.1.4 Register Configuration Table 7-2 lists the registers of the 8-bit timer module. Each channel has an independent set of registers. Table 7-2. 8-Bit Timer Registers Name Timer control register Timer control/status register Timer constant register A Timer constant register B Timer counter Serial/timer control register Abbreviation TCR TCSR TCORA TCORB TCNT STCR R/W R/W R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value H'00 H'10 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'F8 Address TMR0 TMR1 H'FFC8 H'FFD0 H'FFC9 H'FFD1 H'FFCA H'FFD2 H'FFCB H'FFD3 H'FFCC H'FFD4 H'FFC3 H'FFC3 Note: * Software can write a "0" to clear bits 7 to 5, but cannot write a "1" in these bits. 7.2 Register Descriptions 7.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)--H'FFCC (TMR0), H'FFD4 (TMR1) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W Each timer counter (TCNT) is an 8-bit up-counter that increments on a pulse generated from an internal or external clock source selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0) of the timer control register (TCR). The CPU can always read or write the timer counter. The timer counter can be cleared by an external reset input or by an internal compare-match signal generated at a compare-match event. Clock clear bits 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0) of the timer control register select the method of clearing. When a timer counter overflows from H'FF to H'00, the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to "1." 145 The timer counters are initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 CMIEB CMIEA 0 0 R/W R/W 5 OVIE 0 R/W 4 3 CCLR1 CCLR0 0 0 R/W R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W 146 Bit 7 CMIEB Description 0 Compare-match interrupt request B (CMIB) is disabled. (Initial value) 1 Compare-match interrupt request B (CMIB) is enabled. 7.2.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA and TCORB)--H'FFCA and H'FFCB (TMR0), H'FFD2 and H'FFD3 (TMR1) TCORA and TCORB are 8-bit readable/writable registers. The timer count is continually Bit 6 CMIEA Description 0 Compare-match interrupt request A (CMIA) is disabled. (Initial value) 1 Compare-match interrupt request A (CMIA) is enabled. compared with the constants written in these registers. When a match is detected, the corresponding compare-match flag (CMFA or CMFB) is set in the timer control/status register (TCSR). The timer output signal (TMO0 or TMO1) is controlled by these compare-match signals as Bit 5 OVIE Description 0 The timer overflow interrupt request (OVI) is disabled. (Initial value) 1 The timer overflow interrupt request (OVI) is enabled. specified by output select bits 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0) in the timer control/status register (TCSR). TCORA and TCORB are initialized to H'FF at a reset and in the standby modes. Bit 4 CCLR1 0 0 1 1 Bit 3 CCLR0 0 1 0 1 Description Not cleared. Cleared on compare-match A. Cleared on compare-match B. Cleared on rising edge of external reset input signal. (Initial value) Compare-match is not detected during the T3 state of a write cycle to TCORA or TCORB. See item (3) in section 7.6, "Application Notes." 7.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR)--H'FFC8 (TMR0), H'FFD0 (TMR1) Each TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the clock source and the time at which 147 Bits 2, 1, and 0--Clock Select (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0): These bits and bits ICKS1 and ICKS0 in the serial/timer control register (STCR) select the internal or external clock source for the timer counter. Six internal clock sources, derived by prescaling the system clock, are available for each timer channel. For internal clock sources the counter is incremented on the falling edge of the internal clock. For an external clock source, these bits can select whether to increment the counter on the rising or falling edge of the clock input, or on both edges. TCR Bit 2 Bit 1 Channel CKS2 CKS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 STCR Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 CKS0 ICKS1 ICKS0 0 -- -- 1 -- 0 1 -- 1 0 -- 0 0 -- 1 1 -- 0 1 -- 1 0 -- -- 1 -- -- 0 -- -- 1 -- -- 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 -- 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Description No clock source (timer stopped) (Initial value) O/8 internal clock, counted on falling edge O/2 internal clock, counted on falling edge O/64 internal clock, counted on falling edge O/32 internal clock, counted on falling edge O/1024 internal clock, counted on falling edge O/256 internal clock, counted on falling edge No clock source (timer stopped) External clock source, counted on rising edge External clock source, counted on falling edge External clock source, counted on both rising and falling edges No clock source (timer stopped) (Initial value) O/8 internal clock, counted on falling edge O/2 internal clock, counted on falling edge O/64 internal clock, counted on falling edge O/128 internal clock, counted on falling edge O/1024 internal clock, counted on falling edge O/2048 internal clock, counted on falling edge No clock source (timer stopped) External clock source, counted on rising edge External clock source, counted on falling edge External clock source, counted on both rising and falling edges 148 the timer counter is cleared, and enables interrupts. 7 6 5 4 3 2 CMFB CMFA OVF -- OS3 OS2 Initial value 0 0 0 1 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* -- R/W R/W The TCRs are initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes. For timing diagrams, see section 7.3, "Operation." Bit 7--Compare-match Interrupt Enable B (CMIEB): This bit selects whether to request compare-match interrupt B (CMIB) when compare-match flag B (CMFB) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to "1." Bit 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W Bit 7 CMFB 0 1 Description To clear CMFB, the CPU must read CMFB after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 when TCNT = TCORB. (Initial value) Bit 6 CMFA 0 1 Description To clear CMFA, the CPU must read CMFA after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 when TCNT = TCORA. (Initial value) 149 Bit 6--Compare-match Interrupt Enable A (CMIEA): This bit selects whether to request compare-match interrupt A (CMIA) when compare-match flag A (CMFA) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to "1." Bit 5 OVF Description 0 To clear OVF, the CPU must read OVF after (Initial value) it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. 1 This bit is set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00. Bit 5--Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): This bit selects whether to request a timer overflow interrupt (OVI) when the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to "1." Bits 4 and 3--Counter Clear 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0): These bits select how the timer counter is cleared: by compare-match A or B or by an external reset input. Bit 3 OS3 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 OS1 0 0 1 1 Bit 2 OS2 0 1 0 1 Bit 0 OS0 0 1 0 1 Description No change when compare-match B occurs. Output changes to "0" when compare-match B occurs. Output changes to "1" when compare-match B occurs. Output inverts (toggles) when compare-match B occurs. (Initial value) Description No change when compare-match A occurs. Output changes to "0" when compare-match A occurs. Output changes to "1" when compare-match A occurs. Output inverts (toggles) when compare-match A occurs. (Initial value) 150 7.2.5 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)--H'FFC3 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 MPE 0 R/W 1 ICKS1 0 R/W 0 ICKS0 0 R/W The STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the serial communication interface and selects internal clock sources for the timer counters. The STCR is initialized to H'F8 at a reset. Bits 7 to 3--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as "1." Bit 2--Multiprocessor Enable (MPE): Controls the operating mode of the serial communication interface. For details, see section 8, "Serial Communication Interface." Bits 1 and 0--Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1 and ICKS0): These bits and bits CKS2 to CKS0 in the TCR select clock sources for the timer counters. For details, see section 7.2.3, "Timer Control Register." 151 7.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)--H'FFC9 (TMR0), H'FFD1 (TMR1) Note: * Software can write a "0" in bits 7 to 5 to clear the flags, but cannot write a "1" in these bits. The TCSR is an 8-bit readable and partially writable register that indicates compare-match and overflow status and selects the effect of compare-match events on the timer output signal. The TCSR is initialized to H'10 at a reset and in the standby modes. Bit 7--Compare-Match Flag B (CMFB): This status flag is set to "1" when the timer count O Internal clock TCNT clock pulse TCNT N-1 N N+1 matches the time constant set in TCORB. CMFB must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Figure 7-2 Bit 6--Compare-Match Flag A (CMFA): This status flag is set to "1" when the timer count matches the time constant set in TCORA. CMFA must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. 152 O External clock source TCNT clock pulse TCNT N-1 N N+1 Bit 5--Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag is set to "1" when the timer count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00). OVF must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, O TMCI Fig. 7-3 Minimum TMCI Pulse Width (Single-Edge Incrementation) O TMCI Minimum TMCI Pulse Width (Double-Edge Incrementation) and cannot be set by software. Bit 4--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as "1." Bits 3 to 0--Output Select 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0): These bits specify the effect of compare-match events on the timer output signal (TCOR or TCNT). Bits OS3 and OS2 control the effect of compare-match B on the output level. Bits OS1 and OS0 control the effect of compare-match A on the output level. 153 If compare-match A and B occur simultaneously, any conflict is resolved as explained in item (4) in section 7.6, "Application Notes." O TCNT N N+1 TCOR N Internal compare-match signal CMF After a reset, the timer output is "0" until the first compare-match event. When all four output select bits are cleared to "0" the timer output signal is disabled. Figure 7-5 O Internal compare-match A signal Timer output (TMO) 154 7.3 Operation 7.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing Oo Internal compare-match signal TCNT N H'00 The timer counter increments on a pulse generated once for each period of the selected (internal or external) clock source. Internal Clock: Internal clock sources are created from the system clock by a prescaler. The counter increments on an internal TCNT clock pulse generated from the falling edge of the prescaler output, as shown in figure 7-2. Bits CKS2 to CKS0 of the TCR and bits ICKS1 and ICKS0 of the STCR can select one of the six internal clocks. O o External reset input (TMRI) Internal clear pulse TCNT N-1 N H'00 Figure 7-2. Count Timing for Internal Clock Input External Clock: If external clock input (TMCI) is selected, the timer counter can increment on the rising edge, the falling edge, or both edges of the external clock signal. Figure 7-3 shows incrementation on both edges of the external clock signal. The external clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 system clock periods for incrementation on a 155 single edge, and at least 2.5 system clock periods for incrementation on both edges. See figure 7-4. The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than these values. Oo TCNT H'FF H'00 Internal overflow signal OVF 156 Figure 7-3. Count Timing for External Clock Input Figure 7-4. Minimum External Clock Pulse Widths (Example) 7.3.2 Compare Match Timing (1) Setting of Compare-Match Flags A and B (CMFA and CMFB): The compare-match flags are set to "1" by an internal compare-match signal generated when the timer count matches the time Interrupt CMIA CMIB OVI Description Requested when CMFA and CMIEA are set Requested when CMFB and CMIEB are set Requested when OVF and OVIE are set Priority High Low constant in TCNT or TCOR. The compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which the match is true, just before the timer counter increments to a new value. TCNT H'FF TCORA TCORB H'00 Clear counter TMO pin 157 Accordingly, when the timer count matches one of the time constants, the compare-match signal is not generated until the next period of the clock source. Figure 7-5 shows the timing of the setting of the compare-match flags. Figure 7-5. Setting of Compare-Match Flags (2) Output Timing: When a compare-match event occurs, the timer output (TMO0 or TMO1) changes as specified by the output select bits (OS3 to OS0) in the TCSR. Depending on these bits, the output can remain the same, change to "0," change to "1," or toggle. Figure 7-6 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle on compare-match A. Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT T1 T2 T3 O Internal Address bus TCNT address Internal write signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 7-6. Timing of Timer Output Figure 7-11 158 (3) Timing of Compare-Match Clear: Depending on the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in the TCR, the timer counter can be cleared when compare-match A or B occurs. Figure 7-7 shows the timing of this operation. Figure 7-7. Timing of Compare-Match Clear Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT T1 T2 T3 O Internal Address bus TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT clock pulse TCNT N M Write data 7.3.3 External Reset of TCNT Figure 7-12 When the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in the TCR are both set to "1," the timer counter is cleared on the rising edge of an external reset input. Figure 7-8 shows the timing of this operation. The timer reset pulse width must be at least 1.5 system clock periods. Figure 7-8. Timing of External Reset 159 7.3.4 Setting of TCSR Overflow Flag (OVF) The overflow flag (OVF) is set to "1" when the timer count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00). Figure 7-9 shows the timing of this operation. Write cycle: CPU writes to TCORA or TCORB T1 T2 T3 O Internal address bus TCOR address Internal write signal TCNT N N+1 TCORA or TCORB N M TCOR write data Compare-match A or B signal Inhibited Figure 7-9. Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) Figure 7-13 Output selection Toggle "1" Output "0" Output No change Priority High Low 160 7.4 Interrupts Each channel in the 8-bit timer can generate three types of interrupts: compare-match A and B (CMIA and CMIB), and overflow (OVI). Each interrupt is requested when the corresponding enable bits are set in the TCR and TCSR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each interrupt. Table 7-3 lists information about these interrupts. Table 7-3. 8-Bit Timer Interrupts 7.5 Sample Application In the example below, the 8-bit timer is used to generate a pulse output with a selected duty cycle. No. Description Low Low*1: Clock select bits are rewritten while both clock sources are Low. Timing chart Old clock source 1 New clock source TCNT clock pulse TCNT N N+1 CKS rewrite 2 Low High*2: Clock select bits are rewritten while old clock source is Low and new clock source is High. Old clock source New clock source TCNT clock pulse TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS rewrite The control bits are set as follows: (1) In the TCR, CCLR1 is cleared to "0" and CCLR0 is set to "1" so that the timer counter is cleared when its value matches the constant in TCORA. 161 (2) In the TCSR, bits OS3 to OS0 are set to "0110," causing the output to change to "1" on No. Description Timing chart *1: High Low Old clock source Clock select bits are 3 rewritten while old New clock source clock source is High and *2 new clock source is Low. *3 TCNT clock pulse TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS rewrite 4 High High: Clock select bits are rewritten while both clock sources are High. Old clock source New clock source TCNT clock pulse TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS rewrite compare-match A and to "0" on compare-match B. With these settings, the 8-bit timer provides output of pulses at a rate determined by TCORA with a pulse width determined by TCORB. No software intervention is required. Figure 7-10. Example of Pulse Output 7.6 Application Notes Application programmers should note that the following types of contention can occur in the 8-bit timer. (1) Contention between TCNT Write and Clear: If an internal counter clear signal is generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to the timer counter, the clear signal takes priority and the write is not performed. Figure 7-11 shows this type of contention. 162 Section 8. Serial Communication Interface 8.1 Overview The H8/329 Series includes a serial communication interface (SCI) for transferring serial data to and from other chips. Either synchronous or asynchronous communication can be selected. 8.1.1 Features The features of the on-chip serial communication interface are: * Asynchronous mode The H8/329 Series can communicate with a UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter), ACIA (Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter), or other chip that employs standard asynchronous serial communication. It also has a multiprocessor communication function for communication with other processors. Twelve data formats are available. -- Data length: 7 or 8 bits -- Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits -- Parity: Even, odd, or none -- Multiprocessor bit: "1" or "0" -- Error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors -- Break detection: When a framing error occurs, the break condition can be detected by reading the level of the RxD line directly. * Synchronous mode The SCI can communicate with chips able to perform clocked synchronous data transfer. -- Data length: 8 bits -- Error detection: Overrun errors * Full duplex communication The transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so each channel can transmit and receive simultaneously. Both the transmit and receive sections use double buffering, so continuous data transfer is possible in either direction. * Built-in baud rate generator Any specified baud rate can be generated. * Internal or external clock source The SCI can operate on an internal clock signal from baud rate generator, or an external clock signal input at the SCK pin. * Four interrupts TDR-empty, TSR-empty, receive-end, and receive-error interrupts are requested independently. 163 8.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 8-1 shows a block diagram of the serial communication interface. Bus interface BRR Baud rate generator Clock Internal data bus Module data bus RDR TDR SSR SCR RxD SMR RSR TSR Communication control Parity generate Parity check TxD Internal O O/4 clock O/16 O/64 SCK RSR: RDR: TSR: TDR: SMR: SCR: SSR: BRR: Receive Shift Register (8 bits) Receive Data Register (8 bits) Transmit Shift Register (8 bits) Transmit Data Register (8 bits) Serial Mode Register (8 bits) Serial Control Register (8 bits) Serial Status Register (8 bits) Bit Rate Register (8 bits) External clock source TEI TXI RXI ERI Interrupt signals Figure 8-1. Block Diagram of Serial Communication Interface Figure 8-1 164 8.1.3 Input and Output Pins Table 8-1 lists the input and output pins used by the SCI module. Table 8-1. SCI Input/Output Pins Name Serial clock Receive data Transmit data 8.1.4 Register Configuration Table 8-2 lists the SCI registers. These registers specify the operating mode (synchronous or asynchronous), data format and bit rate, and control the transmit and receive sections. Table 8-2. SCI Registers Name Receive shift register Receive data register Transmit shift register Transmit data register Serial mode register Serial control register Serial status register Bit rate register Serial/timer control register Abbr. RSR RDR TSR TDR SMR SCR SSR BRR STCR R/W -- R -- R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* R/W R/W Value -- H'00 -- H'FF H'00 H'00 H'84 H'FF H'F8 Address -- H'FFDD -- H'FFDB H'FFD8 H'FFDA H'FFDC H'FFD9 H'FFC3 Abbr. SCK RxD TxD I/O Input/output Input Output Function Serial clock input and output. Receive data input. Transmit data output. Note: * Software can write a "0" to clear the flags in bits 7 to 3, but cannot write "1" in these bits. 165 8.2 Register Descriptions 8.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) Bit Read/Write 7 -- 6 -- 5 -- 4 -- 3 -- 2 -- 1 -- 0 -- The RSR receives incoming data bits. When one data character has been received, it is transferred to the receive data register (RDR). The CPU cannot read or write the RSR directly. 8.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)--H'FFDD Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R The RDR stores received data. As each character is received, it is transferred from the RSR to the RDR, enabling the RSR to receive the next character. This double-buffering allows the SCI to receive data continuously. The CPU can read but not write the RDR. The RDR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes. 8.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) Bit Read/Write 7 -- 6 -- 5 -- 4 -- 3 -- 2 -- 1 -- 0 -- The TSR holds the character currently being transmitted. When transmission of this character is completed, the next character is moved from the transmit data register (TDR) to the TSR and transmission of that character begins. If the TDRE bit is still set to "1," however, nothing is transferred to the TSR. The CPU cannot read or write the TSR directly. 166 8.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)--H'FFDB Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W The TDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that holds the next character to be transmitted. When the TSR becomes empty, the character written in the TDR is transferred to the TSR. Continuous data transmission is possible by writing the next byte in the TDR while the current byte is being transmitted from the TSR. The TDR is initialized to H'FF at a reset and in the standby modes. 8.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)--H'FFD8 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 C/A 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W The SMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the communication format and selects the clock rate for the internal clock source. It is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes. For further information on the SMR settings and communication formats, see tables 8-5 and 8-7 in section 8.3, "Operation." Bit 7--Communication Mode (C/A): This bit selects the asynchronous or clocked synchronous communication mode. Bit 7 C/A Description 0 Asynchronous communication. 1 Clocked synchronous communication. (Initial value) 167 Bit 6--Character Length (CHR): This bit selects the character length in asynchronous mode. It is ignored in synchronous mode. The character length is always eight bits in synchronous mode. Bit 6 CHR 0 1 Description 8 bits per character. (Initial value) 7 bits per character. (Bits 0 to 6 in TDR and RDR are sent and received.) Bit 5--Parity Enable (PE): This bit selects whether to add a parity bit in asynchronous mode. It is ignored in synchronous mode, and when a multiprocessor format is used. Bit 5 PE 0 1 Description Transmit: No parity bit is added. Receive: Parity is not checked. Transmit: A parity bit is added. Receive: Parity is checked. (Initial value) Bit 4--Parity Mode (O/E ): In asynchronous mode, when parity is enabled (PE = "1"), this bit selects even or odd parity. Even parity means that a parity bit is added to the data bits for each character to make the total number of 1's even. Odd parity means that the total number of 1's is made odd. This bit is ignored when PE = "0," or when a multiprocessor format is used. It is also ignored in the synchronous mode. Bit 4 O/E 0 1 Description Even parity. Odd parity. (Initial value) 168 Bit 3--Stop Bit Length (STOP): This bit selects the number of stop bits. It is ignored in the synchronous mode. Bit 3 STOP 0 1 Description One stop bit (Initial value) Transmit: one stop bit is added. Receive: one stop bit is checked to detect framing errors. Two stop bits Transmit: two stop bits are added. Receive: the first stop bit is checked to detect framing errors; if the second bit is a space (0), it is regarded as the next start bit. Bit 2--Multiprocessor Mode (MP): This bit selects the multiprocessor format in asynchronous communication. When multiprocessor format is selected, the parity settings of the parity enable bit (PE) and parity mode bit (O/E) are ignored. The MP bit is ignored in synchronous communication. The MP bit is valid only when the MPE bit in the serial/timer control register (STCR) is set to "1." When the MPE bit is cleared to "0," the multiprocessor communication function is disabled regardless of the setting of the MP bit. Bit 2 MP 0 1 Description Multiprocessor communication function is disabled. Multiprocessor communication function is enabled. (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0--Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1 and CKS0): These bits select the internal clock source when the baud rate generator is clocked from within the chip. Bit 1 CKS1 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 0 1 Description O clock O/4 clock O/16 clock O/64 clock (Initial value) 169 8.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR)--H'FFDA Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TIE 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W 3 MPIE 0 R/W 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W 0 CKE0 0 R/W The SCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables various SCI functions. It is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes. Bit 7--Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): This bit enables or disables the TDR-empty interrupt (TXI) requested when the transmit data register empty (TDRE) bit in the serial status register (SSR) is set to "1." Bit 7 TIE 0 1 Description The TDR-empty interrupt request (TXI) is disabled. The TDR-empty interrupt request (TXI) is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 6--Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): This bit enables or disables the receive-end interrupt (RxI) requested when the receive data register full (RDRF) bit in the serial status register (SSR) is set to "1." It also enables or disables the receive-error interrupt (ERI) requested when the overrun error (ORER), framing error (FER), or parity error (PER) bit is set to "1." Bit 6 RIE 0 1 Description The receive-end interrupt (RxI) and receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests are disabled. The receive-end interrupt (RxI) and receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests are enabled. (Initial value) 170 Bit 5--Transmit Enable (TE): This bit enables or disables the transmit function. When the transmit function is enabled, the TxD pin is automatically used for output. When the transmit function is disabled, the TxD pin can be used as a general-purpose I/O port. Bit 5 TE 0 1 Description The transmit function is disabled. The TxD pin can be used for general-purpose I/O. The transmit function is enabled. The TxD pin is used for output. (Initial value) Bit 4--Receive Enable (RE): This bit enables or disables the receive function. When the receive function is enabled, the RxD pin is automatically used for input. When the receive function is disabled, the RxD pin is available as a general-purpose I/O port. Bit 4 RE 0 1 Description The receive function is disabled. The RxD pin can be used for general-purpose I/O. The receive function is enabled. The RxD pin is used for input. (Initial value) 171 Bit 3--Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): When serial data are received in a multiprocessor format, this bit enables or disables the receive-end interrupt (RxI) and receive-error interrupt (ERI) until data with the multiprocessor bit set to "1" are received. It also enables or disables the transfer of received data from the RSR to the RDR, and enables or disables setting of the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER bits in the serial status register (SSR). The MPIE bit is ignored when a multiprocessor format is not used, and in synchronous mode. Clearing the MPIE bit to "0" disables the multiprocessor receive interrupt function. In this condition data are received regardless of the value of the multiprocessor bit in the receive data. Setting the MPIE bit to "1" enables the multiprocessor receive interrupt function. In this condition, if the multiprocessor bit in the receive data is "0," the receive-end interrupt (RxI) and receive-error interrupt (ERI) are disabled, the receive data are not transferred from the RSR to the RDR, and the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER bits in the serial status register (SSR) are not set. If the multiprocessor bit is "1," however, the MPB bit in the SSR is set to "1," the MPIE bit is cleared to "0," the FER, PER, and ORER bits can be set, and the receive-end and receive-error interrupts are enabled. Bit 3 MPIE 0 1 Description The multiprocessor receive interrupt function is disabled. (Initial value) (Normal receive operation) The multiprocessor receive interrupt function is enabled. During the interval before data with the multiprocessor bit set to "1" are received, the receive interrupt request (RxI) and receive-error interrupt request (ERI) are disabled, the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER bits are not set in the serial status register (SSR), and no data are transferred from the RSR to the RDR. The MPIE bit is cleared at the following times: (1) When "0" is written in MPIE. (2) When data with the multiprocessor bit set to "1" are received. 172 Bit 2--Transmit-End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): This bit enables or disables the TSR-empty interrupt (TEI) requested when the transmit-end bit (TEND) in the serial status register (SSR) is set to "1." Bit 2 TEIE 0 1 Description The TSR-empty interrupt request (TEI) is disabled. The TSR-empty interrupt request (TEI) is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 1--Clock Enable 1 (CKE1): This bit selects the internal or external clock source for the baud rate generator. When the external clock source is selected, the SCK pin is automatically used for input of the external clock signal. Bit 1 CKE1 0 1 Description Internal clock source. When C/A = "1," the serial clock signal is output at the SCK pin. When C/A = "0," output depends on the CKE0 bit. External clock source. The SCK pin is used for input. (Initial value) Bit 0--Clock Enable 0 (CKE0): When an internal clock source is used in asynchronous mode, this bit enables or disables serial clock output at the SCK pin. This bit is ignored when the external clock is selected, or when synchronous mode is selected. For further information on the communication format and clock source selection, see table 8-7 in section 8.3, "Operation." Bit 0 CKE0 0 1 Description The SCK pin is not used by the SCI (and is available as a general-purpose I/O port). The SCK pin is used for serial clock output. (Initial value) 173 8.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)--H'FFDC Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER 1 0 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* 2 TEND 1 R 1 MPB 0 R 0 MPBT 0 R/W Note: * Software can write a "0" to clear the flags, but cannot write a "1" in these bits. The SSR is an 8-bit register that indicates transmit and receive status. It is initialized to H'84 at a reset and in the standby modes. Bit 7--Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): This bit indicates when the TDR contents have been transferred to the TSR and the next character can safely be written in the TDR. Bit 7 TDRE 0 1 Description To clear TDRE, the CPU must read TDRE after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 at the following times: (1) When TDR contents are transferred to the TSR. (2) When the TE bit in the SCR is cleared to "0." (Initial value) Bit 6--Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): This bit indicates when one character has been received and transferred to the RDR. Bit 6 RDRF 0 1 Description To clear RDRF, the CPU must read RDRF after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 when one character is received without error and transferred from the RSR to the RDR. (Initial value) 174 Bit 5--Overrun Error (ORER): This bit indicates an overrun error during reception. Bit 5 ORER 0 1 Description To clear ORER, the CPU must read ORER after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 if reception of the next character ends while the receive data register is still full (RDRF = "1"). (Initial value) Bit 4--Framing Error (FER): This bit indicates a framing error during data reception in asynchronous mode. It has no meaning in synchronous mode. Bit 4 FER 0 1 Description To clear FER, the CPU must read FER after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 if a framing error occurs (stop bit = "0"). (Initial value) Bit 3--Parity Error (PER): This bit indicates a parity error during data reception in the asynchronous mode, when a communication format with parity bits is used. This bit has no meaning in the synchronous mode, or when a communication format without parity bits is used. Bit 3 PER 0 1 Description To clear PER, the CPU must read PER after (Initial value) it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to "1" when a parity error occurs (the parity of the received data does not match the parity selected by the O/E bit in SMR). 175 Bit 2--Transmit End (TEND): This bit indicates that transmission of a character has ended and the serial communication interface has stopped transmitting because there is no valid data in the TDR. The TEND bit is also set to "1" when the TE bit in the serial control register (SCR) is cleared to "0." The TEND bit can be read but not written. To use the TEI interrupt, after TEND is cleared to "0" at the start of data transmission, set TEIE to "1" to enable the interrupt. Bit 2 TEND 0 1 Description To clear TEND, the CPU must read TDRE after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in TDRE. This bit is set to "1" when: (1) TE = "0" (2) TDRE = "1" at the end of transmission of a character (Initial value) Bit 1--Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit in data received in a multiprocessor format in asynchronous communication mode. In synchronous mode, when a multiprocessor format is not used, or if the RE bit is cleared to "0" when a multiprocessor format is used, the MPB bit retains its previous value. MPB can be read but not written. Bit 1 MPB 0 1 Description Multiprocessor bit = "0" in receive data. Multiprocessor bit = "1" in receive data. (Initial value) Bit 0--Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit inserted in transmit data when a multiprocessor format is used in asynchronous communication mode. The MPBT bit is double-buffered, in the same way that TSR and TDR are double-buffered. The MPBT bit has no effect in synchronous mode, or when a multiprocessor format is not used. Bit 0 MPBT 0 1 Description Multiprocessor bit = "0" in transmit data. Multiprocessor bit = "1" in transmit data. (Initial value) 176 8.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR)--H'FFD9 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W The BRR is an 8-bit register that, together with the CKS1 and CKS0 bits in the SMR, determines the baud rate output by the baud rate generator. The BRR is initialized to H'FF (the slowest rate) at a reset and in the standby modes. Tables 8-3 and 8-4 show examples of BRR (N) and CKS (n) settings for commonly used bit rates. Table 8-3. Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (1) XTAL frequency (MHz) 2.4576 4 Error N (%) n N 86 +0.31 1 141 255 0 1 103 127 0 0 207 63 0 0 103 31 0 0 51 15 0 0 25 7 0 0 12 3 0 -- -- 1 0 -- -- ---- 0 1 0 0 -- -- 2 Bit rate 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- -- 0 -- Error N (%) 70 +0.03 207 +0.16 103 +0.16 51 +0.16 25 +0.16 12 +0.16 ---- ---- ---- 0 0 ---- n 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 Error (%) +0.03 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 -- -- 0 -- n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- -- 4.194304 Error N (%) 148 -0.04 108 +0.21 217 +0.21 108 +0.21 54 -0.70 26 +1.14 13 -2.48 6 -2.48 -- -- -- -- -- -- 177 Table 8-3. Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (2) XTAL frequency (MHz) 6 7.3728 Error Error N (%) n N (%) 52 +0.50 2 64 +0.70 155 +0.16 1 191 0 77 +0.16 1 95 0 155 +0.16 0 191 0 77 +0.16 0 95 0 38 +0.16 0 47 0 19 -2.34 0 23 0 9 -2.34 0 11 0 4 -2.34 0 5 0 2 0 -- -- -- ---- 0 2 0 Bit rate 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 4.9152 Error N (%) 174 -0.26 127 0 255 0 127 0 63 0 31 0 15 0 7 0 3 0 ---- 1 0 8 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 -- N 70 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 -- 3 -- Error (%) +0.03 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 -- 0 -- n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- Table 8-3. Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (3) XTAL frequency (MHz) 10 12 Error N (%) n N 88 -0.25 2 106 64 +0.16 2 77 129 +0.16 1 155 64 +0.16 1 77 129 +0.16 0 155 64 +0.16 0 77 32 -1.36 0 38 15 +1.73 0 19 7 +1.73 -- -- 4 0 0 5 3 +1.73 -- -- Bit rate 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9.8304 Error N (%) 86 +0.31 255 0 127 0 255 0 127 0 63 0 31 0 15 0 7 0 4 -1.70 3 0 12.288 Error (%) -0.44 0 0 0 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 -2.34 -- 0 -- n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 108 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 4 5 -- Error (%) +0.08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 +2.40 -- n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 178 Table 8-3. Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (4) XTAL frequency (MHz) 16 19.6608 Error Error N (%) n N (%) 141 +0.03 2 174 -0.26 103 +0.16 2 127 0 207 +0.16 1 255 0 103 +0.16 1 127 0 207 +0.16 0 255 0 103 +0.16 0 127 0 51 +0.16 0 63 0 25 +0.16 0 31 0 12 +0.16 0 15 0 7 0 0 9 -1.70 ---- 0 7 0 Bit rate 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 14.7456 Error N (%) 130 -0.07 95 0 191 0 95 0 191 0 95 0 47 0 23 0 11 0 ---- 5 0 20 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 43 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 9 7 Error (%) +0.88 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 +0.16 -1.36 +1.73 0 +1.73 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- Note: If possible, the error should be within 1%. B = OSC x 106/[64 x 22n x (N + 1)] N: BRR value (0 N 255) OSC: Crystal oscillator frequency in MHz B: Bit rate (bits/second) n: Internal clock source (0, 1, 2, or 3) The meaning of n is given by the table below: n 0 1 2 3 CKS1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 Clock O O/4 O/16 O/64 179 Table 8-4. Examples of BRR Settings in Synchronous Mode XTAL frequency (MHz) 4 8 10 n N n N n -- -- -- -- -- 2 124 2 249 -- 1 249 2 124 -- 1 124 1 249 -- 0 199 1 99 1 0 99 0 199 0 0 49 0 99 0 0 19 0 39 0 0 9 0 19 0 0 4 0 9 -- 0 1 0 3 0 0 0* 0 1 -- 0 0* -- Bit rate 100 250 500 1k 2.5k 5k 10k 25k 50k 100k 250k 500k 1M 2.5M 2 n -- 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 N -- 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 -- 0* 16 N -- -- -- -- 124 249 124 49 24 -- 4 -- -- n -- 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N -- 124 249 124 199 99 199 79 39 19 7 3 1 n -- -- -- -- 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 20 N -- -- -- -- 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 -- 0* Notes: Blank: No setting is available. --: A setting is available, but the bit rate is inaccurate. * Continuous transfer is not possible. B = OSC x 106/[8 x 22n x (N + 1)] N: BRR value (0 N 255) OSC: Crystal oscillator frequency in MHz B: Bit rate (bits/second) n: Internal clock source (0, 1, 2, or 3) The meaning of n is given by the table below: n 0 1 2 3 CKS1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 Clock O O/4 O/16 O/64 180 8.2.9 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)--H'FFC3 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 MPE 0 R/W 1 ICKS1 0 R/W 0 ICKS0 0 R/W The STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operating mode of the serial communication interface and selects input clock sources for the 8-bit timer counters (TCNT). The STCR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset. Bits 7 to 3--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as "1." Bit 2--Multiprocessor Enable (MPE): Enables or disables the SCI's multiprocessor communication function. Bit 2 MPE 0 1 Description The multiprocessor communication function is disabled, regardless of the setting of the MP bit in SMR. The multiprocessor communication function is enabled. The multiprocessor format can be selected by setting the MP bit in SMR to "1." (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0--Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICKS0): These bits select the clock input to the timer counters (TCNT) in the 8-bit timers. For further information see section 7.2.3, "Timer Control Register." 181 8.3 Operation 8.3.1 Overview The SCI supports serial data transfer in two modes. In asynchronous mode each character is synchronized individually. In synchronous mode communication is synchronized with a clock signal. The selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode and the communication format depend on settings in the SMR as indicated in table 8-5. The clock source depends on the settings of the C/A bit in the SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in the SCR as indicated in table 8-6. (1) Asynchronous Mode: * Data lengths of seven or eight bits can be selected. * A parity bit or multiprocessor bit can be added, and stop bit lengths of one or two bits can be selected. These selections determine the communication format and character length. * Framing errors (FER), parity errors (PER) and overrun errors (ORER) can be detected in receive data, and the line-break condition can be detected. * An internal or external clock source can be selected for the serial clock. * When an internal clock source is selected, the SCI is clocked by the on-chip baud rate generator and can output a clock signal at the bit-rate frequency. * When the external clock source is selected, the on-chip baud rate generator is not used. The external clock frequency must be 16 times the bit rate. (2) * * * * * Synchronous Mode: The transmit data length is eight bits. Overrun errors (ORER) can be detected in receive data. An internal or external clock source can be selected for the serial clock. When an internal clock source is selected, the SCI is clocked by the on-chip baud rate generator and outputs a serial clock signal. When the external clock source is selected, the on-chip baud rate generator is not used and the SCI operates on the input serial clock. 182 Table 8-5. Communication Formats Used by SCI SMR settings Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 2 Bit 5 Bit 3 C/A CHR MP PE STOP 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 -- 0 1 1 0 1 1 -- -- -- -- Communication format Data Multipro- Parity Stop-bit Mode length cessor bit bit length Asynchronous mode 8 bits None None 1 bit 2 bits Present 1 bit 2 bits 7 bits None 1 bit 2 bits Present 1 bit 2 bits Asynchronous mode 8 bits Present None 1 bit (multiprocessor 2 bits format) 7 bits 1 bit 2 bits Synchronous mode 8 bits None None Table 8-6. SCI Clock Source Selection SMR Bit 7 C/A 0 SCR Bit 1 Bit 0 CKE1 CKE0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Mode Async Serial transmit/receive clock Clock source SCK pin function Internal Input/output port (not used by SCI) Serial clock output at bit rate External Serial clock input at 16 x bit rate Internal External Serial clock output Serial clock input 1 Sync 183 8.3.2 Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode, each transmitted or received character is individually synchronized by framing it with a start bit and stop bit. Full duplex data transfer is possible because the SCI has independent transmit and receive sections. Double buffering in both sections enables data to be written and read during serial communication, for continuous data transfer. Figure 8-2 shows the general format of one character sent or received in asynchronous mode. The communication channel is normally held in the mark state (High). Character transmission or reception starts with a transition to the space state (Low). The first bit transmitted or received is the start bit (Low). It is followed by the data bits, in which the least significant bit (LSB) comes first. The data bits are followed by the parity or multiprocessor bit, if present, then the stop bit or bits (High) confirming the end of the frame. In receiving, the SCI synchronizes on the falling edge of the start bit, and samples each bit at the center of the bit (at the 8th cycle of the internal serial clock, which runs at 16 times the bit rate). (LSB) (MSB) Parity or multiprocessor bit Idle state (mark) Start bit D0 D1 D7 Stop bit Serial data 1 bit 7 or 8 bits One unit of data (one character or frame) 0 or 1 bit 1 or 2 bits Figure 8-2. Data Format in Asynchronous Mode (1) Data Format: Table 8-7 lists the data formats that can be sent and received in asynchronous mode. Twelve formats can be selected by bits in the SMR. Fig. 8-2 184 Table 8-7. Data Formats in Asynchronous Mode SMR Bits CHR PE 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 -- -- -- -- MP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 STOP 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 S S S S S S S S S S S S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 STOP STOP P P 11 12 8-Bit data 8-Bit data 8-Bit data 8-Bit data 7-Bit data 7-Bit data 7-Bit data 7-Bit data 8-Bit data 8-Bit data 7-Bit data 7-Bit data MPB MPB STOP STOP P P STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP MPB MPB STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP Notes: SMR: Serial mode register START: Start bit STOP: Stop bit P: Parity bit MPB: Multiprocessor bit (2) Clock: In asynchronous mode it is possible to select either an internal clock created by the onchip baud rate generator, or an external clock input at the SCK pin. The clock selection depends on the C/A bit in the serial mode register (SMR) and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in the serial control register (SCR). Refer to table 8-6. If an external clock is input at the SCK pin, its frequency should be 16 times the desired bit rate. If the internal clock provided by the on-chip baud rate generator is selected and the SCK pin is used for clock output, the output clock frequency is equal to the bit rate, and the clock pulse rises at the center of the transmit data bits. Figure 8-3 shows the phase relationship between the output clock and transmit data. 185 "0" D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 "1" "1" One frame Figure 8-3. Phase Relationship between Clock Output and Transmit Data (Asynchronous Mode) (3) Transmitting and Receiving Data * SCI Initialization: Before transmitting or receiving, software must clear the TE and RE bits to "0" in the serial control register (SCR), then initialize the SCI as follows. Note: When changing the communication mode or format, always clear the TE and RE bits to "0" before following the procedure given below. Clearing TE to "0" sets TDRE to "1" and initializes the transmit shift register (TSR). Clearing RE to "0," however, does not initialize H8/329 U.M. '92 the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags and receive data register (RDR), which retain their Fig. 8-3 previous contents. When an external clock is used, the clock should not be stopped during initialization or subsequent operation. SCI operation becomes unreliable if the clock is stopped. 186 Initialization 1. 2. Select the communication format in the serial mode register (SMR). Write the value corresponding to the bit rate in the bit rate register (BRR). This step is not necessary when an external clock is used. Select interrupts and the clock source in the serial control register (SCR). Leave TE and RE cleared to "0." If clock output is selected, in asynchronous mode, clock output starts immediately after the setting is made in SCR. Wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive one bit, then set TE or RE in the serial control register (SCR). Setting TE or RE enables the SCI to use the TxD or RxD pin. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as necessary to enable interrupts. The initial states are the mark transmit state, and the idle receive state (waiting for a start bit). Clear TE and RE bits to "0" in SCR 3. 1 Select communication format in SMR 4. 2 Set value in BRR 3 Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (leaving TE and RE cleared to "0") 1 bit interval elapsed? Yes 4 No Set TE or RE to "1" in SCR, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE as necessary Start transmitting or receiving Figure 8-4. Sample Flowchart for SCI Initialization H8/338 U.M. '9 Fig. 9-4 187 * Transmitting Serial Data: Follow the procedure below for transmitting serial data. 1 Initialize 1. SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin is selected automatically. SCI status check and transmit data write: read the serial status register (SSR), check that the TDRE bit is "1," then write transmit data in the transmit data register (TDR) and clear TDRE to "0." If a multiprocessor format is selected, after writing the transmit data write "0" or "1" in the multiprocessor bit transfer (MPBT) in SSR. Transition of the TDRE bit from "0" to "1" can be reported by an interrupt. Start transmitting 2. 2 Read TDRE bit in SSR No TDRE = "1"? Yes Write transmit data in TDR If using multiprocessor format, select MPBT value in SSR 3. (a) To continue transmitting serial data: read the TDRE bit to check whether it is safe to write; if TDRE = "1," write data in TDR, then clear TDRE to "0." (b) To end serial transmission: end of transmission can be confirmed by checking transition of the TEND bit from "0" to "1." This can be reported by a TEI interrupt. Clear TDRE bit to "0" in SSR Serial transmission End of transmission? Yes Read TEND bit in SSR No No 4. To output a break signal at the end of serial transmission: set the DDR bit to "1" and clear the DR bit to "0" (DDR and DR are I/O port registers), then clear TE to "0" in SCR. 3 TEND = "1"? Yes 4 Output break signal? Yes Set DR = "0," DDR = "1" Clear TE bit in SCR to "0" No End Figure 8-5. Sample Flowchart for Transmitting Serial Data H8/338 U.M. '9 Fig. 9-5 188 In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE bit in SSR. When TDRE is cleared to "0" the SCI recognizes that the transmit data register (TDR) contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into the transmit shift register (TSR). 2. After loading the data from TDR into TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE bit to "1" and starts transmitting. If the TIE bit (TDR-empty interrupt enable) is set to "1" in SCR, the SCI requests a TXI interrupt (TDR-empty interrupt) at this time. Serial transmit data are transmitted in the following order from the TxD pin: (a) Start bit: one "0" bit is output. (b) Transmit data: seven or eight bits are output, LSB first. (c) Parity bit or multiprocessor bit: one parity bit (even or odd parity) or one multiprocessor bit is output. Formats in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be selected. (d) Stop bit: one or two "1" bits (stop bits) are output. (e) Mark state: output of "1" bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data. 3. The SCI checks the TDRE bit when it outputs the stop bit. If TDRE is "0," the SCI loads new data from TDR into TSR, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. If TDRE is "1," the SCI sets the TEND bit to "1" in SSR, outputs the stop bit, then continues output of "1" bits in the mark state. If the TEIE bit (TSR-empty interrupt enable) in SCR is set to "1," a TEI interrupt (TSR-empty interrupt) is requested. 189 Figure 8-6 shows an example of SCI transmit operation in asynchronous mode. "1" Start bit "0" D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 "1" Start bit "0" D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 "1" "1" Mark (idle) state TDRE TEND TXI request TXI interrupt handler writes data in TDR and clears TDRE to "0" 1 frame TXI request TEI request Figure 8-6. Example of SCI Transmit Operation (8-Bit Data with Parity and One Stop Bit) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 8-6 190 * Receiving Serial Data: Follow the procedure below for receiving serial data. 1 Initialize 1. Start receiving 2. SCI initialization: the receive data function of the RxD pin is selected automatically. SCI status check and receive data read: read the serial status register (SSR), check that RDRF is set to "1," then read receive data from the receive data register (RDR) and clear RDRF to "0." Transition of the RDRF bit from "0" to "1" can be reported by an RXI interrupt. To continue receiving serial data: read RDR and clear RDRF to "0" before the stop bit of the current frame is received. Receive error handling and break detection: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER, PER, and FER bits in SSR to identify the error. After executing the necessary error handling, clear ORER, PER, and FER all to "0." Transmitting and receiving cannot resume if ORER, PER, or FER remains set to "1." When a framing error occurs, the RxD pin can be read to detect the break state. 2 Read RDRF bit in SSR No RDRF = "1"? 3. Yes Read receive data from RDR, and clear RDRF bit to "0" in SSR 3 Read ORER, PER, and FER in SSR 4. PER RER ORER = "1"? No Yes 4 Finished receiving? Yes Clear RE to "0" in SCR No Error handling End Start error handling FER = "1"? No Clear error flags to "0" in SCR Return Yes Break? No Yes Clear RE to "0" in SCR End Figure 8-7. Sample Flowchart for Receiving Serial Data 191 H8/338 U.M. '9 Fig. 9-7 In receiving, the SCI operates as follows. 1. The SCI monitors the receive data line and synchronizes internally when it detects a start bit. 2. Receive data are shifted into RSR in order from LSB to MSB. 3. The parity bit and stop bit are received. After receiving these bits, the SCI makes the following checks: (a) Parity check: the number of 1s in the receive data must match the even or odd parity setting of the O/E bit in SMR. (b) Stop bit check: the stop bit value must be "1." If there are two stop bits, only the first stop bit is checked. (c) Status check: RDRF must be "0" so that receive data can be loaded from RSR into RDR. If these checks all pass, the SCI sets RDRF to "1" and stores the received data in RDR. If one of the checks fails (receive error), the SCI operates as indicated in table 8-8. Note: When a receive error flag is set, further receiving is disabled. The RDRF bit is not set to "1." Be sure to clear the error flags. 4. After setting RDRF to "1," if the RIE bit (receive-end interrupt enable) is set to "1" in SCR, the SCI requests an RXI (receive-end) interrupt. If one of the error flags (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to "1" and the RIE bit in SCR is also set to "1," the SCI requests an ERI (receive-error) interrupt. 192 Figure 8-8 shows an example of SCI receive operation in asynchronous mode. Table 8-8. Receive Error Conditions and SCI Operation Receive error Overrun error Abbreviation ORER Condition Receiving of next data ends while RDRF is still set to "1" in SSR Stop bit is "0" Parity of receive data differs from even/odd parity setting in SMR Data transfer Receive data not loaded from RSR into RDR Receive data loaded from RSR into RDR Receive data loaded from RSR into RDR Framing error Parity error FER PER "1" Start bit "0" D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 "1" Start bit "0" D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 "0" "1" Mark (idle) state RDRF FER RXI request 1 frame RXI interrupt handler reads data in RDR and clears RDRF to "0" Framing error, ERI request Figure 8-8. Example of SCI Receive Operation (8-Bit Data with Parity and One Stop Bit) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 8-8 193 (4) Multiprocessor Communication The multiprocessor communication function enables several processors to share a single serial communication line. The processors communicate in asynchronous mode using a format with an additional multiprocessor bit (multiprocessor format). In multiprocessor communication, each receiving processor is addressed by an ID. A serial communication cycle consists of two cycles: an ID-sending cycle that identifies the receiving processor, and a data-sending cycle. The multiprocessor bit distinguishes ID-sending cycles from data-sending cycles. The transmitting processor starts by sending the ID of the receiving processor with which it wants to communicate as data with the multiprocessor bit set to "1." Next the transmitting processor sends transmit data with the multiprocessor bit cleared to "0." Receiving processors skip incoming data until they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to "1." After receiving data with the multiprocessor bit set to "1," the receiving processor with an ID matching the received data continues to receive further incoming data. Multiple processors can send and receive data in this way. Four formats are available. Parity-bit settings are ignored when a multiprocessor format is selected. For details see table 8-7. Transmitting processor Serial communication line Receiving processor A (ID = 01) Receiving processor B (ID = 02) Receiving processor C (ID = 03) Receiving processor D (ID = 04) Serial data H'01 (MPB = 1) ID-sending cycle: receiving processor address H'AA (MPB = 0) Data-sending cycle: data sent to receiving processor specified by ID MPB: multiprocessor bit Figure 8-9. Example of Communication among Processors Using Multiprocessor Format (Sending Data H'AA to Receiving Processor A) 194 * Transmitting Multiprocessor Serial Data: See figures 8-5 and 8-6. * Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data: Follow the procedure below for receiving multiprocessor serial data. 1 Initialize 1. SCI initialization: the receive data function of the RxD pin is selected automatically. ID receive cycle: Set the MPIE bit in the serial control register (SCR) to "1." SCI status check and ID check: read the serial status register (SSR), check that RDRF is set to "1," then read receive data from the receive data register (RDR) and compare with the processor's own ID. Transition of the RDRF bit from "0" to "1" can be reported by an RXI interrupt. If the ID does not match the receive data, set MPIE to "1" again and clear RDRF to "0." If the ID matches the receive data, clear RDRF to "0." SCI status check and data receiving: read SSR, check that RDRF is set to "1," then read data from the receive data register (RDR) and write "0" in the RDRF bit. Transition of the RDRF bit from "0" to "1" can be reported by an RXI interrupt. Receive error handling and break detection: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER bits in SSR to identify the error. After executing the necessary error handling, clear both ORER and FER to "0." Receiving cannot resume while ORER or FER remains set to "1." When a framing error occurs, the RxD pin can be read to detect the break state. Start receiving 2. 2 Set MPIE bit to "1" in SCR 3. 3 Read RDRF bit in SSR No RDRF = "1"? Yes Read receive data from RDR 5. 4. Own ID? Yes Read ORER and FER bits in SSR FER ORER = "1"? No 4 Read RDRF bit in SSR No Yes RDRF = "1"? Yes Read ORER and FER bits in SSR No Read receive data from RDR Start error handling 5 Error handling No FER = "1"? No Clear error flags Yes Break? No Clear RE bit to "0" in SCR End Yes FER + ORER = "1"? No Finished receiving? Yes Clear RE to "0" in SCR Yes End Return Figure 8-10. Sample Flowchart for Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data 195 Figure 8-11 shows an example of SCI receive operation using a multiprocessor format. "1" Start bit "0" D0 Data (ID1) D1 D7 MPB "1" Stop bit "1" Start bit "0" D0 Data (Data2) D1 D7 MPB "0" Stop bit "1" "1" Mark (idle) state MPIE RDRF RDR value RXI request, MPIE = "0" (Multiprocessor interrupt) (a) Own ID does not match data RXI handler reads RDR data and clears RDRF to "0" ID1 Not own ID, so MPIE is set to "1" again No RXI request, RDR not updated "1" Start bit "0" D0 Data (ID2) D1 D7 MPB "1" Stop bit "1" Start bit "0" D0 Data (Data2) D1 D7 MPB "0" Stop bit "1" "1" Mark (idle) state MPIE RDRF RDR value ID1 RXI request, MPIE = "0" (Multiprocessor interrupt) (b) Own ID matches data RXI handler reads RDR data and clears RDRF to "0" ID2 Own ID, so receiving continues, with data received at each RXI Data 2 MPIE set to "1" again Figure 8-11. Example of SCI Receive Operation (Eight-Bit Data with Multiprocessor Bit and One Stop Bit) H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 8-11 196 8.3.3 Clocked Synchronous Operation (1) Overview: In clocked synchronous mode, the SCI transmits and receives data in synchronization with clock pulses. This mode is suitable for high-speed serial communication. The SCI transmitter and receiver share the same clock but are otherwise independent, so full duplex communication is possible. The transmitter and receiver are also double buffered, so continuous transmitting or receiving is possible by reading or writing data while transmitting or receiving is in progress. Figure 8-12 shows the general format in clocked synchronous serial communication. One unit (character or frame) of serial data * Serial clock LSB Data Don't care Note: * High except in continuous transmitting or receiving Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 MSB Bit 7 Don't care * Figure 8-12. Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication In clocked synchronous serial communication, each data bit is sent on the communication line from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data are received in synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock. In each character, the serial data bits are transmitted in order from LSB (first) to MSB (last). After output of the MSB, the communication line remains in the state of the MSB until the next falling edge of the serial clock. H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 8-12 197 * Communication Format: The data length is fixed at eight bits. No parity bit or multiprocessor bit can be added. * Clock: An internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input from the SCK pin can be selected by clearing or setting the CKE1 bit in the serial control register (SCR). See table 8-5. When the SCI operates on an internal clock, it outputs the clock signal at the SCK pin. Eight clock pulses are output per transmitted or received character. When the SCI is not transmitting or receiving, the clock signal remains at the high level. (2) Transmitting and Receiving Data * SCI Initialization: The SCI must be initialized in the same way as in asynchronous mode. See figure 8-4. When switching from asynchronous mode to clocked synchronous mode, check that the ORER, FER, and PER bits are cleared to "0." Transmitting and receiving cannot begin if ORER, FER, or PER is set to "1." 198 * Transmitting Serial Data: Follow the procedure below for transmitting serial data. 1 Initialize 1. SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin is selected automatically. SCI status check and transmit data write: read the serial status register (SSR), check that the TDRE bit is "1," then write transmit data in the transmit data register (TDR) and clear TDRE to "0." Transition of the TDRE bit from "0" to "1" can be reported by a TXI interrupt. Start transmitting 2. 2 Read TDRE bit in SSR No TDRE = "1"? Yes Write transmit data in TDR and clear TDRE bit to "0" in SSR 3. (a) To continue transmitting serial data: read the TDRE bit to check whether it is safe to write; if TDRE = "1," write data in TDR, then clear TDRE to "0." (b) To end serial transmission: end of transmission can be confirmed by checking transition of the TEND bit from "0" to "1." This can be reported by a TEI interrupt. Serial transmission 3 End of transmission? Yes No Read TEND bit in SSR No TEND = "1"? Yes Clear TE bit to "0" in SCR End Figure 8-13. Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmitting H8/338 U.M. '9 Fig. 9-13 199 In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE bit in SSR. When TDRE is cleared to "0" the SCI recognizes that the transmit data register (TDR) contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into the transmit shift register (TSR). 2. After loading the data from TDR into TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE bit to "1" and starts transmitting. If the TIE bit (TDR-empty interrupt enable) in SCR is set to "1," the SCI requests a TXI interrupt (TDR-empty interrupt) at this time. If clock output is selected the SCI outputs eight serial clock pulses, triggered by the clearing of the TDRE bit to "0." If an external clock source is selected, the SCI outputs data in synchronization with the input clock. Data are output from the TxD pin in order from LSB (bit 0) to MSB (bit 7). 3. The SCI checks the TDRE bit when it outputs the MSB (bit 7). If TDRE is "0," the SCI loads data from TDR into TSR, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. If TDRE is "1," the SCI sets the TEND bit in SSR to "1," transmits the MSB, then holds the output in the MSB state. If the TEIE bit (transmit-end interrupt enable) in SCR is set to "1," a TEI interrupt (TSRempty interrupt) is requested at this time. 4. After the end of serial transmission, the SCK pin is held at the high level. 200 Figure 8-14 shows an example of SCI transmit operation. Serial clock Data Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 TDRE TEND TXI request TXI interrupt TXI handler writes request data in TDR and clears TDRE to "0" 1 frame TEI request Figure 8-14. Example of SCI Transmit Operation H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 8-14 201 * Receiving Serial Data: Follow the procedure below for receiving serial data. When switching from asynchronous mode to clocked synchronous mode, be sure to check that PER and FER are cleared to "0." If PER or FER is set to "1" the RDRF bit will not be set and both transmitting and receiving will be disabled. 1 Initialize 1. SCI initialization: the receive data function of the RxD pin is selected automatically. SCI status check and receive data read: read the serial status register (SSR), check that RDRF is set to "1," then read receive data from the receive data register (RDR) and clear RDRF to "0." Transition of the RDRF bit from "0" to "1" can be reported by an RXI interrupt. To continue receiving serial data: read RDR and clear RDRF to "0" before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received. Receive error handling: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER bit in SSR then, after executing the necessary error handling, clear ORER to "0." Neither transmitting nor receiving can resume while ORER remains set to "1." When clock output mode is selected, receiving can be halted temporarily by receiving one dummy byte and causing an overrun error. When preparations to receive the next data are completed, clear the ORER bit to "0." This causes receiving to resume, so return to the step marked 2 in the flowchart. Start receiving 2. 2 Read RDRF bit in SSR No RDRF = "1"? Yes 3. 4. 3 Read receive data from RDR, and clear RDRF bit to "0" in SSR Read ORER in SSR ORER = "1"? No Finished receiving? Yes Clear RE to "0" in SCR Yes 4 Error handling No End Start error handling Overrun error handling Clear ORER to "0" in SSR Return Figure 8-15. Sample Flowchart for Serial Receiving 202 In receiving, the SCI operates as follows. 1. If an external clock is selected, data are input in synchronization with the input clock. If clock output is selected, as soon as the RE bit is set to "1" the SCI begins outputting the serial clock and inputting data. If clock output is stopped because the ORER bit is set to "1," output of the serial clock and input of data resume as soon as the ORER bit is cleared to "0." 2. Receive data are shifted into RSR in order from LSB to MSB. After receiving the data, the SCI checks that RDRF is "0" so that receive data can be loaded from RSR into RDR. If this check passes, the SCI sets RDRF to "1" and stores the received data in RDR. If the check does not pass (receive error), the SCI operates as indicated in table 8-8. Note: Both transmitting and receiving are disabled while a receive error flag is set. The RDRF bit is not set to "1." Be sure to clear the error flag. 3. After setting RDRF to "1," if the RIE bit (receive-end interrupt enable) is set to "1" in SCR, the SCI requests an RXI (receive-end) interrupt. If the ORER bit is set to "1" and the RIE bit in SCR is set to "1," the SCI requests an ERI (receive-error) interrupt. When clock output mode is selected, clock output stops when the RE bit is cleared to "0" or the ORER bit is set to "1." To prevent clock count errors, it is safest to receive one dummy byte and generate an overrun error. 203 Figure 8-16 shows an example of SCI receive operation. Serial clock Data Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 RDRF ORER RXI request RXI interrupt handler reads data in RDR and clears RDRF to "0" 1 frame RXI request Overrun error, ERI request Figure 8-16. Example of SCI Receive Operation H8/329 U.M. '92 Fig. 8-16 204 * Transmitting and Receiving Serial Data Simultaneously: Follow the procedure below for transmitting and receiving serial data simultaneously. If clock output mode is selected, output of the serial clock begins simultaneously with serial transmission. 1 Initialize 1. Start SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin and receive data input function of the RxD pin are selected, enabling simultaneous transmitting and receiving. SCI status check and transmit data write: read the serial status register (SSR), check that the TDRE bit is "1," then write transmit data in the transmit data register (TDR) and clear TDRE to "0." Transition of the TDRE bit from "0" to "1" can be reported by a TXI interrupt. SCI status check and receive data read: read the serial status register (SSR), check that the RDRF bit is "1," then read receive data from the receive data register (RDR) and clear RDRF to "0." Transition of the RDRF bit from "0" to "1" can be reported by an RXI interrupt. To continue transmitting and receiving serial data: read RDR and clear RDRF to "0" before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received. Also read the TDRE bit and check that it is set to "1," indicating that it is safe to write; then write data in TDR and clear TDRE to "0" before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted. Receive error handling: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER bit in SSR then, after executing the necessary error handling, clear ORER to "0." Neither transmitting nor receiving can resume while ORER remains set to "1." 2 Read TDRE bit in SSR 2. No TDRE = "1"? Yes 3 Write transmit data in TDR and clear TDRE bit to "0" in SSR 4. Read RDRF bit in SSR 3. No RDRF = "1"? Yes 5. 4 Read receive data from RDR and clear RDRF bit to "0" in SSR Read ORER bit in SSR ORER = "1"? No End of transmitting and receiving? Yes Clear TE and RE bits to "0" in SCR Yes 5 Error handling No End Figure 8-17. Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmitting and Receiving Note: In switching from transmitting or receiving to simultaneous transmitting and receiving, clear both TE and RE to "0," then set both TE and RE to "1." 205 H8/329 U.M. ' Fig. 8-17 8.4 SCI Interrupts The SCI can request four types of interrupts: ERI, RXI, TXI, and TEI. Table 8-9 indicates the source and priority of these interrupts. The interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled by the TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in the SCR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each interrupt source, except that the receive-error interrupt (ERI) is the logical OR of three sources: overrun error, framing error, and parity error. The TXI interrupt indicates that the next transmit data can be written. The TEI interrupt indicates that the SCI has stopped transmitting data. Table 8-9. SCI Interrupt Sources Interrupt ERI RXI TXI TEI Description Receive-error interrupt (ORER, FER, or PER) Receive-end interrupt (RDRF) TDR-empty interrupt (TDRE) TSR-empty interrupt (TEND) Priority High Low 8.5 Application Notes Application programmers should note the following features of the SCI. (1) TDR Write: The TDRE bit in the SSR is simply a flag that indicates that the TDR contents have been transferred to the TSR. The TDR contents can be rewritten regardless of the TDRE value. If a new byte is written in the TDR while the TDRE bit is "0," before the old TDR contents have been moved into the TSR, the old byte will be lost. Software should check that the TDRE bit is set to "1" before writing to the TDR. 206 (2) Multiple Receive Errors: Table 8-10 lists the values of flag bits in the SSR when multiple receive errors occur, and indicates whether the RSR contents are transferred to the RDR. Table 8-10. SSR Bit States and Data Transfer When Multiple Receive Errors Occur SSR bits ORER FER 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 RSR RDR*2 No Yes Yes No No Yes No Receive error Overrun error Framing error Parity error Overrun and framing errors Overrun and parity errors Framing and parity errors Overrun, framing, and parity errors RDRF 1*1 0 0 1*1 1*1 0 1*1 PER 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Notes: *1 Set to "1" before the overrun error occurs. *2 Yes: The RSR contents are transferred to the RDR. No: The RSR contents are not transferred to the RDR. (3) Line Break Detection: When the RxD pin receives a continuous stream of 0's in asynchronous mode (line-break state), a framing error occurs because the SCI detects a "0" stop bit. The value H'00 is transferred from the RSR to the RDR. Software can detect the line-break state as a framing error accompanied by H'00 data in the RDR. The SCI continues to receive data, so if the FER bit is cleared to "0" another framing error will occur. (4) Sampling Timing and Receive Margin in Asynchronous Mode: The serial clock used by the SCI in asynchronous mode runs at 16 times the baud rate. The falling edge of the start bit is detected by sampling the RxD input on the falling edge of this clock. After the start bit is detected, each bit of receive data in the frame (including the start bit, parity bit, and stop bit or bits) is sampled on the rising edge of the serial clock pulse at the center of the bit. See figure 8-18. It follows that the receive margin can be calculated as in equation (1). When the absolute frequency deviation of the clock signal is 0 and the clock duty factor is 0.5, data can theoretically be received with distortion up to the margin given by equation (2). This is a theoretical limit, however. In practice, system designers should allow a margin of 20% to 30%. 207 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314 1516 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12131415 16 1 2 3 4 5 Basic clock -7.5 pulses Receive data Start bit +7.5 pulses D0 D1 Sync sampling Data sampling Figure 8-18. Sampling Timing (Asynchronous Mode) M = {(0.5 - 1/2N) - (D - 0.5)/N - (L - 0.5)F} x 100 [%] M: N: D: L: F: Receive margin Ratio of basic clock to baud rate (N=16) Duty factor of clock--ratio of High pulse width to Low width (0.5 to 1.0) Frame length (9 to 12) Absolute clock frequency deviation Figure 8-18 (1) When D = 0.5 and F = 0 M = (0.5 -1/2 x 16) x 100 [%] = 46.875% (2) 208 Section 9. A/D Converter 9.1 Overview The H8/329 Series includes an analog-to-digital converter module with eight input channels. A/D conversion is performed by the successive approximations method with 8-bit resolution. 9.1.1 Features The features of the on-chip A/D module are: * 8-bit resolution * Eight analog input channels * Rapid conversion Conversion time is 12.2s per channel (minimum) with a 10MHz system clock * External triggering can be selected * Single and scan modes -- Single mode: A/D conversion is performed once. -- Scan mode: A/D conversion is performed in a repeated cycle on one to four channels. * Sample-and-hold function * Four 8-bit data registers These registers store A/D conversion results for up to four channels. * A CPU interrupt (ADI) can be requested at the completion of each A/D conversion cycle. 209 9.1.2 Block Diagram Bus interface Module data bus Internal data bus AVCC Successive approximations register 8 Bit D/A AVSS A D D R A A D D R B A D D R C A D D R D A D C S R A D C R AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 Analog multiplexer + - Control circuit Comparator O/8 O/16 Sample and hold circuit ADI ADTRG Interrupt signal ADCR: ADCSR: ADDRA: ADDRB: ADDRC: ADDRD: A/D Control Register (8 bits) A/D Control/Status Register (8 bits) A/D Data Register A (8 bits) A/D Data Register B (8 bits) A/D Data Register C (8 bits) A/D Data Register D (8 bits) Figure 9-1. Block Diagram of A/D Converter 210 9.1.3 Input Pins Table 9-1 lists the input pins used by the A/D converter module. The eight analog input pins are divided into two groups, consisting of analog inputs 0 to 3 (AN0 to AN3) and analog inputs 4 to 7 (AN4 to AN7), respectively. Table 9-1. A/D Input Pins Name Analog supply voltage Analog ground Analog input 0 Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 3 Analog input 4 Analog input 5 Analog input 6 Analog input 7 A/D external trigger Abbreviation AVCC AVSS AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 ADTRG I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Function Power supply and reference voltage for the analog circuits. Ground and reference voltage for the analog circuits. Analog input pins, group 0 Analog input pins, group 1 External trigger for starting A/D conversion 9.1.4 Register Configuration Table 9-2 lists the registers of the A/D converter module. Table 9-2. A/D Registers Name A/D data register A A/D data register B A/D data register C A/D data register D A/D control/status register A/D control register Abbreviation ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD ADCSR ADCR R/W R R R R R/(W)* R/W Initial value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'7E Address H'FFE0 H'FFE2 H'FFE4 H'FFE6 H'FFE8 H'FFEA Note: * Software can write a "0" to clear bit 7, but cannot write a "1" in this bit. 211 9.2 Register Descriptions 9.2.1 A/D Data Registers (ADDR)--H'FFE0 to H'FFE6 Bit ADDRn Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R (n = A to D) The four A/D data registers (ADDRA to ADDRD) are 8-bit read-only registers that store the results of A/D conversion. Each data register is assigned to two analog input channels as indicated in table 9-3. The A/D data registers are always readable by the CPU. The A/D data registers are initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes. Table 9-3. Assignment of Data Registers to Analog Input Channels Analog input channel Group 0 Group 1 A/D data register AN0 AN4 ADDRA AN1 AN5 ADDRB AN2 AN6 ADDRC AN3 AN7 ADDRD 9.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)--H'FFE8 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ADF 0 R/(W)* 6 ADIE 0 R/W 5 ADST 0 R/W 4 SCAN 0 R/W 3 CKS 0 R/W 2 CH2 0 R/W 1 CH1 0 R/W 0 CH0 0 R/W Note: * Software can write a "0" in bit 7 to clear the flag, but cannot write a "1" in this bit. The A/D control/status register (ADCSR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of the A/D converter module. 212 The ADCSR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes. Bit 7--A/D End Flag (ADF): This status flag indicates the end of one cycle of A/D conversion. Bit 7 ADF 0 1 Description To clear ADF, the CPU must read ADF after it has been set to "1," then write a "0" in this bit. This bit is set to 1 at the following times: (1) Single mode: when one A/D conversion is completed. (2) Scan mode: when inputs on all selected channels have been converted. (Initial value) Bit 6--A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): This bit selects whether to request an A/D interrupt (ADI) when A/D conversion is completed. Bit 6 ADIE 0 1 Description The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is disabled. The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 5--A/D Start (ADST): The A/D converter operates while this bit is set to "1." This bit can be set to "1" by the external trigger signal ADTRG. Bit 5 ADST 0 1 Description A/D conversion is halted. (Initial value) (1) Single mode: One A/D conversion is performed. The ADST bit is automatically cleared to "0" at the end of the conversion. (2) Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues cyclically on the selected channels until the ADST bit is cleared to "0" by software (or a reset, or by entry to a standby mode). 213 Bit 4--Scan Mode (SCAN): This bit selects the scan mode or single mode of operation. See section 9.3, "Operation" for descriptions of these modes. The mode should be changed only when the ADST bit is cleared to "0." Bit 4 SCAN 0 1 Description Single mode Scan mode (Initial value) Bit 3--Clock Select (CKS): This bit controls the A/D conversion time. The conversion time should be changed only when the ADST bit is cleared to "0." Bit 3 CKS 0 1 Description Conversion time = 242 states (max) Conversion time = 122 states (max) (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0--Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): These bits and the SCAN bit combine to select one or more analog input channels. The channel selection should be changed only when the ADST bit is cleared to "0." Group select CH2 0 Channel select CH1 CH0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Selected channels Single mode Scan mode AN0 (Initial value) AN0 AN1 AN0, AN1 AN2 AN0 to AN2 AN3 AN0 to AN3 AN4 AN4 AN5 AN4, AN5 AN6 AN4 to AN6 AN7 AN4 to AN7 1 214 9.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)--H'FFEA Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TRGE 0 R/W 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 CHS 0 R/W The A/D control register (ADCR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables the A/D external trigger signal. The ADCR is initialized to H'7E at a reset and in the standby modes. Bit 7--Trigger Enable (TRGE): This bit enables the ADTRG (A/D external trigger) signal to set the ADST bit and start A/D conversion. Bit 7 TRGE 0 1 Description A/D external trigger is disabled. ADTRG does not set the ADST bit. A/D external trigger is enabled. ADTRG sets the ADST bit. (The ADST bit can also be set by software.) (Initial value) Bits 6 to 1--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as "1." Bit 0--Channel Set Select (CHS): This bit is reserved. It does not affect the operation of the chip. 215 9.3 Operation The A/D converter performs 8 successive approximations to obtain a result ranging from H'00 (corresponding to AVSS) to H'FF (corresponding to AVCC). The A/D converter module can be programmed to operate in single mode or scan mode as explained below. 9.3.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) The single mode is suitable for obtaining a single data value from a single channel. A/D conversion starts when the ADST bit is set to "1," either by software or by a High-to-Low transition of the ADTRG signal (if enabled). During the conversion process the ADST bit remains set to "1." When conversion is completed, the ADST bit is automatically cleared to "0." When the conversion is completed, the ADF bit is set to "1." If the interrupt enable bit (ADIE) is also set to "1," an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) is requested, so that the converted data can be processed by an interrupt-handling routine. The ADF bit is cleared when software reads the A/D control/status register (ADCSR), then writes a "0" in this bit. Before selecting the single mode, clock, and analog input channel, software should clear the ADST bit to "0" to make sure the A/D converter is stopped. Changing the mode, clock, or channel selection while A/D conversion is in progress can lead to conversion errors. A/D conversion begins when the ADST bit is set to "1" again. The same instruction can be used to alter the mode and channel selection and set ADST to "1." 216 The following example explains the A/D conversion process in single mode when channel 1 (AN1) is selected and the external trigger is disabled. Figure 9-2 shows the corresponding timing chart. (1) Software clears the ADST bit to "0," then selects the single mode (SCAN = "0") and channel 1 (CH2 to CH0 = "001"), enables the A/D interrupt request (ADIE = "1"), and sets the ADST bit to "1" to start A/D conversion. Coding Example: (when using the slow clock, CKS = "0") BCLR #5, @H'FFE8 ;Clear ADST MOV.B #H'7F, ROL MOV.B ROL, @H'FFEA ;Disable external trigger MOV.B #H'61, ROL MOV.B ROL, @H'FFE8 ;Select mode and channel and set ADST to "1" Value set in ADCSR: ADF 0 ADIE 1 ADST 1 SCAN 0 CKS 0 CH2 0 CH1 0 CH0 1 (2) The A/D converter converts the voltage level at the AN1 input pin to a digital value. At the end of the conversion process the A/D converter transfers the result to register ADDRB, sets the ADF bit to "1," clears the ADST bit to "0," and halts. (3) ADF = "1" and ADIE = "1," so an A/D interrupt is requested. (4) The user-coded A/D interrupt-handling routine is started. (5) The interrupt-handling routine reads the ADCSR value, then writes a "0" in the ADF bit to clear this bit to "0." (6) The interrupt-handling routine reads ADDRB and processes the A/D conversion result. (7) The routine ends. Steps (2) to (7) can now be repeated by setting the ADST bit to "1" again. 217 Interrupt (ADI) Set* ADIE A/D conversion starts Set* ADST Set* Clear* Clear* ADF Channel 0 (AN 0) Waiting Channel 1 (AN 1) Waiting A/D conversion Waiting A/D conversion Waiting Channel 2 (AN 2) Waiting Channel 3 (AN 3) Waiting ADDRA Read result A/D conversion result Read result A/D conversion result ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD Note: * indicates execution of a software instruction Figure 9-2. A/D Operation in Single Mode (when Channel 1 is Selected) 9.3.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1) The scan mode can be used to monitor analog inputs on one or more channels. When the ADST bit is set to "1," either by software or by a High-to-Low transition of the ADTRG signal (if enabled), A/D conversion starts from the first channel selected by the CH bits. When CH2 = "0" the first channel is AN0. When CH2 = "1" the first channel is AN4. If the scan group includes more than one channel (i.e., if bit CH1 or CH0 is set), conversion of the next channel (AN1 or AN5)begins as soon as conversion of the first channel ends. Conversion of the selected channels continues cyclically until the ADST bit is cleared to "0." The conversion results are placed in the data registers corresponding to the selected channels. The A/D data registers are readable by the CPU. Before selecting the scan mode, clock, and analog input channels, software should clear the ADST bit to "0" to make sure the A/D converter is stopped. Changing the mode, clock, or channel selection while A/D conversion is in progress can lead to conversion errors. A/D conversion begins from the first selected channel when the ADST bit is set to "1" again. The same instruction can be used to alter the mode and channel selection and set ADST to "1." The following example explains the A/D conversion process when three channels in group 0 are selected (AN0, AN1, and AN2) and the external trigger is disabled. Figure 9-3 shows the corresponding timing chart. (1) Software clears the ADST bit to "0," then selects the scan mode (SCAN = "1"), scan group 0 (CH2 = "0"), and analog input channels AN0 to AN2 (CH1 = "1", CH0 = "0") and sets the ADST bit to "1" to start A/D conversion. Coding Example: (with slow clock and ADI interrupt enabled) BCLR #5, @H'FFE8 ;Clear ADST MOV.B #H'7F, ROL MOV.B ROL, @H'FFEA ;Disable external trigger MOV.B #H'72, ROL MOV.B ROL, @H'FFE8 ;Select mode and channels and set ADST to "1" Value set in ADCSR ADF 0 ADIE 1 ADST 1 SCAN 1 CKS 0 CH2 0 CH1 1 CH0 0 219 (2) The A/D converter converts the voltage level at the AN0 input pin to a digital value, and transfers the result to register ADDRA. (3) Next the A/D converter converts AN1 and transfers the result to ADDRB. Then it converts AN2 and transfers the result to ADDRC. (4) After all selected channels (AN0 to AN2) have been converted, the AD converter sets the ADF bit to "1." If the ADIE bit is set to "1," an A/D interrupt (ADI) is requested. Then the A/D converter begins converting AN0 again. (5) Steps (2) to (4) are repeated cyclically as long as the ADST bit remains set to "1." To stop the A/D converter, software must clear the ADST bit to "0." Regardless of which channel is being converted when the ADST bit is cleared to "0," when the ADST bit is set to "1" again, conversion begins from the the first selected channel (AN0). 220 Continuous A/D conversion Set * 1 Clear *1 ADST Clear* 1 ADF A/D conversion time Waiting A/D conversion Waiting Waiting A/D conversion Waiting A/D conver- * 2 sion Waiting Channel 0 (AN 0) Channel 1 (AN 1) A/D conversion Waiting A/D conversion Waiting Transfer Waiting Channel 2 (AN 2) Waiting Channel 3 (AN 3) ADDRA A/D conversion result A/D conversion result ADDRB A/D conversion result ADDRC A/D conversion result ADDRD Notes: *1 *2 indicates execution of a software instruction Data undergoing conversion when ADST bit is cleared are ignored. Figure 9-3. A/D Operation in Scan Mode (when Channels 0 to 2 are Selected) 9.3.3 Input Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Time The A/D converter includes a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. Sampling of the input starts at a time tD after the ADST bit is set to "1." The sampling process lasts for a time tSPL. The actual A/D conversion begins after sampling is completed. Figure 9-4 shows the timing of these steps. Table 9-4 (a) lists the conversion times for the single mode. Table 9-4 (b) lists the conversion times for the scan mode. The total conversion time (tCONV) includes tD and tSPL. The purpose of tD is to synchronize the ADCSR write time with the A/D conversion process, so the length of tD is variable. The total conversion time therefore varies within the minimum to maximum ranges indicated in table 9-4 (a) and (b). In the scan mode, the ranges given in table 9-4 (b) apply to the first conversion. The length of the second and subsequent conversion processes is fixed at 256 states (when CKS = "0") or 128 states (when CKS = "1"). (1) O Internal address bus (2) Write signal Input sampling timing ADF tD tSPL t CONV (1): (2): ADCSR write cycle ADCSR address Synchronization delay Input sampling time Total A/D conversion time tD: tSPL: tCONV: Figure 9-4. A/D Conversion Timing 222 Table 9-4 (a). A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) CKS = "0" Min Typ Max 18 -- 33 -- 63 -- 227 -- 242 CKS = "1" Min Typ 10 -- -- 31 115 -- Item Synchronization delay Input sampling time Total A/D conversion time Symbol tD tSPL tCONV Max 17 -- 122 Table 9-4 (b). A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode) CKS = "0" Min Typ Max 18 -- 33 -- 63 -- 259 -- 274 CKS = "1" Min Typ 10 -- -- 31 131 -- Item Synchronization delay Input sampling time Total A/D conversion time Symbol tD tSPL tCONV Max 17 -- 138 Note: Values in the tables above are numbers of states. 9.3.4 External Trigger Input Timing A/D conversion can be started by external trigger input at the ADTRG pin. This input is enabled or disabled by the TRGE bit in the A/D control register (ADCR). If the TRGE bit is set to "1," when a falling edge of ADTRG is detected the ADST bit is set to "1" and A/D conversion begins. Subsequent operation in both single and scan modes is the same as when the ADST bit is set to "1" by software. Figure 9-5 shows the trigger timing. 223 O ADTRG Internal trigger signal ADST A/D conversion Figure 9-5. External Trigger Input Timing 9.4 Interrupts The A/D conversion module generates an A/D-end interrupt request (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion. Fig. 9-5 The ADI interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit in the A/D control/status register (ADCSR). 224 Section 10. RAM 10.1 Overview The H8/329 and H8/328 include 1k byte of on-chip static RAM. The H8/327 has 512 bytes. The H8/326 has 256 bytes. The on-chip RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. Both byte and word access to the on-chip RAM are performed in two states, enabling rapid data transfer and instruction execution. The on-chip RAM is assigned to addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F in the H8/329 and H8/328, addresses H'FD80 to H'FF7F in the H8/327, and addresses H'FE80 to H'FF7F in the H8/326. The RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) can enable or disable the on-chip RAM, permitting these addresses to be allocated to external memory instead, if so desired. 10.2 Block Diagram Figure 10-1 is a block diagram of the on-chip RAM. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'FB80 H'FB82 H'FB81 H'FB83 On-chip RAM H'FF7E Even address H'FF7F Odd address Figure 10-1. Block Diagram of On-Chip RAM (H8/329 and H8/328) Fig. 10-1 225 10.3 RAM Enable Bit (RAME) in System Control Register (SYSCR) The on-chip RAM is enabled or disabled by the RAME (RAM Enable) bit in the system control register (SYSCR). Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 -- 1 -- 0 RAME 1 R/W The only bit in the system control register that concerns the on-chip RAM is the RAME bit. See section 2.2, "System Control Register" for the other bits. Bit 0--RAM Enable (RAME): This bit enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized to "1" on the rising edge of the RES signal, so a reset enables the onchip RAM. The RAME bit is not initialized in the software standby mode. Bit 7 RAME 0 1 Description On-chip RAM is disabled. On-chip RAM is enabled. (Initial value) 10.4 Operation 10.4.1 Expanded Modes (Modes 1 and 2) If the RAME bit is set to "1," accesses to addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F in the H8/329 and H8/328, addresses H'FD80 to H'FF7F in the H8/327, and addresses H'FE80 to H'FF7F in the H8/326 are directed to the on-chip RAM. If the RAME bit is cleared to "0," accesses to these addresses are directed to the external data bus. 10.4.2 Single-Chip Mode (Mode 3) If the RAME bit is set to "1," accesses to addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F in the H8/329 and H8/328, addresses H'FD80 to H'FF7F in the H8/327, and addresses H'FE80 to H'FF7F in the H8/326 are directed to the on-chip RAM. If the RAME bit is cleared to "0," the on-chip RAM data cannot be accessed. Attempted write access has no effect. Attempted read access always results in H'FF data being read. 226 Section 11. ROM 11.1 Overview The H8/329 includes 32k bytes of high-speed, on-chip ROM. The H8/328 has 24k bytes. The H8/327 has 16k bytes. The H8/326 has 8k bytes. The on-chip ROM is connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus. Both byte data and word data are accessed in two states, enabling rapid data transfer and instruction fetching. The H8/329 and H8/327 are available with electrically programmable ROM (PROM). The PROM version has a PROM mode in which the chip can be programmed with a standard PROM writer. The on-chip ROM is enabled or disabled depending on the MCU operating mode, which is determined by the inputs at the mode pins (MD1 and MD0). See table 11-1. Table 11-1. On-Chip ROM Usage in Each MCU Mode Mode pins MD0 MD1 0 1 1 0 1 1 Mode Mode 1 (expanded mode) Mode 2 (expanded mode) Mode 3 (single-chip mode) On-Chip ROM Disabled (external addresses) Enabled Enabled 227 11.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 11-1 is a block diagram of the on-chip ROM. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'0000 H'0002 H'0001 H'0003 On-chip ROM H'7FFE Even addresses H'7FFF Odd addresses Figure 11-1. Block Diagram of On-Chip ROM (H8/329) 11.2 PROM Mode (H8/329, H8/327) 11.2.1 PROM Mode Setup In the PROM mode of the PROM version of the H8/329 and H8/327, the usual microcomputer functions are halted to allow the on-chip PROM to be programmed. The programming method is Fig. 11-1 the same as for the HN27C256. To select the PROM mode, apply the signal inputs listed in table 11-2. Table 11-2. Selection of PROM Mode Pin Mode pin MD1 Mode pin MD0 STBY pin Pins P63 and P64 Input Low Low Low High 228 11.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Assignments and Memory Map The H8/329 and H8/327 can be programmed with a general-purpose PROM writer. Since the package has more than 32 pins, a socket adapter is necessary. Table 11-3 lists recommended socket adapters. Figure 11-2 shows the socket adapter pin assignments by giving the correspondence between H8/329 or H8/327 pins and HN27C256 pin functions. The same socket adapter can be used for both the H8/329 and H8/327. Figures 11-3 and 11-4 show memory maps in the PROM mode. Since the H8/329 has only 32k bytes of on-chip PROM, its address range should be specified as H'0000 to H'7FFF. Since the H8/327 has only 16k bytes of on-chip PROM, its address range should be specified as H'0000 to H'3FFF. H'FF data should be specified for unused address areas. It is important to limit the program address range to H'0000 to H'7FFF for the H8/329, and to H'0000 to H'3FFF for the H8/327, and specify H'FF data for H'8000 or H'4000 and higher addresses. If data (other than H'FF) are written by mistake in addresses equal to or greater than H'8000 in the H8/329, or H'4000 in the H8/327, it may become impossible to program or verify the PROM data. With a windowed package, it is possible to erase the data and reprogram, but this cannot be done with a plastic package, so particular care is required. Table 11-3. Recommended Socket Adapters Package 64-pin windowed shrink DIP (DC-64S) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 68-pin PLCC (DP-68) Recommended socket adapter HS328ESS02H HS328ESH02H HS328ESC02H 229 H8/329 or H8/327 CP-68 13 14 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 37 38 32 15 42 22 21 16 23 17 51 1 18 35 52 FP-64A 4 5 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 26 27 22 8 31 12 11 7 13 8 40 -- -- -- -- DC-64S DP-64S 12 13 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 34 35 30 14 39 20 19 15 21 16 48 -- -- -- -- Pin RES NMI P3 0 P3 1 P3 2 P3 3 P3 4 P3 5 P3 6 P3 7 P1 0 P1 1 P1 2 P1 3 P1 4 P1 5 P1 6 P1 7 P2 0 P2 1 P2 2 P2 3 P2 4 P2 5 P2 6 P2 7 P6 3 P6 4 AV CC VCC VCC MD0 MD1 STBY AV SS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS EPROM Socket Pin V PP EA 9 EO 0 EO 1 EO 2 EO 3 EO 4 EO 5 EO 6 EO 7 EA 0 EA 1 EA 2 EA 3 EA 4 EA 5 EA 6 EA 7 EA 8 OE EA 10 EA 11 EA 12 EA 13 EA 14 CE VCC HN27C256 (28 pins) 1 24 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 25 22 21 23 2 26 27 20 28 VSS 14 V PP: EO 7 to EO 0: EA 14 to EA 0: OE: CE: Program voltage (12.5 V) Data input/output Address input Output enable Chip enable Note: All pins not listed in this figure should be left open. Figure 11-2. Socket Adapter Pin Assignments H8/329 U.M Fig. 11-2 230 Address in MCU mode H'0000 Address in PROM mode H'0000 On-chip PROM H'7FFF H'7FFF Figure 11-3. Memory Map of H8/329 in PROM Mode Address in MCU mode H'0000 Address in PROM mode H'0000 Fig. 11-3 On-chip PROM H'3FFF H'3FFF "1" output * Note: * If this area is read in PROM mode, the output data are H'FF. H'7FFF Figure 11-4. Memory Map of H8/327 in PROM Mode Fig. 11-4 231 11.3 Programming The write, verify, and other sub-modes of the PROM mode are selected as shown in table 11-4. Table 11-4. Selection of Sub-Modes in PROM Mode Sub-Mode Write Verify Programming inhibited CE Low High High OE High Low High VPP VPP VPP VPP VCC VCC VCC VCC EO7 to EO0 Data input Data output High impedance EA14 to EA0 Address input Address input Address input Note: The VPP and VCC pins must be held at the VPP and VCC voltage levels. The H8/329 and H8/327 PROM has the same standard read/write specifications as the HN27C256 and HN27256 EPROM. 11.3.1 Writing and Verifying An efficient, high-speed programming procedure can be used to write and verify PROM data. This procedure writes data quickly without subjecting the chip to voltage stress and without sacrificing data reliability. It leaves the data H'FF written in unused addresses. Figure 11-5 shows the basic high-speed programming flowchart. Tables 11-5 and 11-6 list the electrical characteristics of the chip in the PROM mode. Figure 11-6 shows a write/verify timing chart. 232 START Set program/verify mode VCC = 6.0V 0.25V, V PP = 12.5V 0.3V Address = 0 n=0 n+1 n Write time tPW = 1 ms 5% Yes No n < 25? No Verify OK? Yes Write tOPW = 3n ms Address + 1 Address Last address? Yes Set read mode VCC = 5.0V 0.5V, V PP = VCC No Error No All addresses read? Yes END Figure 11-5. High-Speed Programming Flowchart Fig. 11-5 233 Table 11-5. DC Characteristics (when VCC = 6.0V 0.25V, VPP = 12.5V 0.3V, VSS = 0V, Ta = 25C 5C) Measurement Max Unit conditions VCC + 0.3 V Item Input High voltage EO7 - EO0, EA14 - EA0, OE, CE Input Low voltage EO7 - EO0, EA14 - EA0, OE, CE Output High voltage EO7 - EO0 Output Low voltage EO7 - EO0 Input leakage EO7 - EO0, current EA14 - EA0, OE, CE VCC current VPP current Symbol Min VIH 2.4 Typ -- VIL -0.3 -- 0.8 V VOH VOL |ILI| 2.4 -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.45 2 V V A IOH = -200A IOL = 1.6mA Vin = 5.25V/ 0.5V ICC IPP -- -- -- -- 40 40 mA mA Table 11-6. AC Characteristics (when VCC = 6.0V 0.25V, VPP = 12.5V 0.3V, Ta = 25C 5C) Measurement conditions See figure 11-6* Item Address setup time OE setup time Data setup time Address hold time Data hold time Data output disable time Vpp setup time Program pulse width Symbol tAS tOES tDS tAH tDH tDF tVPS tPW Min 2 2 2 0 2 -- 2 0.95 Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1.0 Max -- -- -- -- -- 130 -- 1.05 Unit s s s s s ns s ms Note: * Input pulse level: 0.8V to 2.2V Input rise/fall time 20ns Timing reference levels: input--1.0V, 2.0V; output--0.8V, 2.0V 234 Table 11-6. AC Characteristics (cont.) (when VCC = 6.0V 0.25V, VPP = 12.5V 0.3V, Ta = 25C 5C) Measurement conditions See figure 11-6* Item OE pulse width for overwrite-programming VCC setup time Data output delay time Symbol tOPW tVCS tOE Min 2.85 2 0 Typ -- -- -- Max 78.75 -- 500 Unit ms s ns Note: * Input pulse level: 0.8V to 2.2V Input rise/fall time 20ns Timing reference levels: input--1.0V, 2.0V; output--0.8V, 2.0V Write Verify Address tAS Data Input data Output data tAH tDS VPP VPP VCC tDH tDF tVPS VCC GND tVCS CE tPW OE tOES tOE tOPW Figure 11-6. PROM Write/Verify Timing 235 11.3.2 Notes on Writing (1) Write with the specified voltages and timing. The programming voltage (VPP) is 12.5V. Caution: Applied voltages in excess of the specified values can permanently destroy the chip. Be particularly careful about the PROM writer's overshoot characteristics. If the PROM writer is set to Hitachi HN27256 or HN27C256 specifications, or to Intel specifications, VPP will be 12.5V. (2) Before writing data, check that the socket adapter and chip are correctly mounted in the PROM writer. Overcurrent damage to the chip can result if the index marks on the PROM writer, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned. (3) Don't touch the socket adapter or chip while writing. Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors. 11.3.3 Reliability of Written Data An effective way to assure the data holding characteristics of the programmed chips is to bake them at 150C, then screen them for data errors. This procedure quickly eliminates chips with PROM memory cells prone to early failure. Figure 11-7 shows the recommended screening procedure. 236 Write and verify program Bake with power off 150 10C, 48 Hr + 8 Hr * - 0 Hr Read and check program VCC = 4.5V and 5.5V Install Note: * Baking time should be measured from the point when the baking oven reaches 150C. Figure 11-7. Recommended Screening Procedure If a series of write errors occurs while the same PROM writer is in use, stop programming and check the PROM writer and socket adapter for defects, using a microcomputer chip with a windowed package and on-chip EPROM. Please inform Hitachi of any abnormal conditions noted during programming or in screening of program data after high-temperature baking. 11.3.4 Erasing of Data The windowed package enables data to be erased by illuminating the window with ultraviolet light. Table 11-7 lists the erasing conditions. Table 11-7. Erasing Conditions Item Ultraviolet wavelength Minimum illumination Value 253.7 nm 15W*s/cm2 Fig. 11-7 The conditions in table 11-7 can be satisfied by placing a 12000W/cm2 ultraviolet lamp 2 or 3 centimeters directly above the chip and leaving it on for about 20 minutes. 237 11.4 Handling of Windowed Packages (1) Glass Erasing Window: Rubbing the glass erasing window of a windowed package with a plastic material or touching it with an electrically charged object can create a static charge on the window surface which may cause the chip to malfunction. If the erasing window becomes charged, the charge can be neutralized by a short exposure to ultraviolet light. This returns the chip to its normal condition, but it also reduces the charge stored in the floating gates of the PROM, so it is recommended that the chip be reprogrammed afterward. Accumulation of static charge on the window surface can be prevented by the following precautions: x When handling the package, ground yourself. Don't wear gloves. Avoid other possible sources of static charge. y Avoid friction between the glass window and plastic or other materials that tend to accumulate static charge. z Be careful when using cooling sprays, since they may have a slight ion content. { Cover the window with an ultraviolet-shield label, preferably a label including a conductive material. Besides protecting the PROM contents from ultraviolet light, the label protects the chip by distributing static charge uniformly. (2) Handling after Programming: Fluorescent light and sunlight contain small amounts of ultraviolet, so prolonged exposure to these types of light can cause programmed data to invert. In addition, exposure to any type of intense light can induce photoelectric effects that may lead to chip malfunction. It is recommended that after programming the chip, you cover the erasing window with a light-proof label (such as an ultraviolet-shield label). 238 Section 12. Power-Down State 12.1 Overview The H8/329 Series has a power-down state that greatly reduces power consumption by stopping some or all of the chip functions. The power-down state includes three modes: (1) Sleep mode - a software-triggered mode in which the CPU halts but the rest of the chip remains active (2) Software standby mode - a software-triggered mode in which the entire chip is inactive (3) Hardware standby mode - a hardware-triggered mode in which the entire chip is inactive Table 12-1 lists the conditions for entering and leaving the power-down modes. It also indicates the status of the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, etc. in each power-down mode. Table 12-1. Power-Down State Entering procedure Execute SLEEP instruction Set SSBY bit in SYSCR to "1," then execute SLEEP instruction Set STBY pin to Low level CPU Sup. Reg's. Mod. Held Run I/O ports Held Exiting methods * Interrupt * RES * STBY * NMI * IRQ0 - IRQ2 * STBY * RES * STBY High, then RES Low High Mode Sleep mode Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Clock Run CPU Halt RAM Held Halt Halt Held Halt Held and initialized Halt Held and initialized Held Halt Halt Not held High impedance state Notes: 1. SYSCR: System control register 2. SSBY: Software standby bit 239 12.2 System Control Register: Power-Down Control Bits Bits 7 to 4 of the system control register (SYSCR) concern the power-down state. Specifically, they concern the software standby mode. Table 12-2 lists the attributes of the system control register. Table 12-2. System Control Register Name System control register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W Abbreviation SYSCR 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W R/W R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W Initial value H'0B 3 -- 1 -- Address H'FFC4 1 -- 1 -- 0 RAME 1 R/W 2 NMIEG 0 R/W Bit 7--Software Standby (SSBY): This bit enables or disables the transition to the software standby mode. On recovery from the software standby mode by an external interrupt, SSBY remains set to "1." To clear this bit, software must write a "0." Bit 7 SSBY 0 1 Description The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to the sleep mode. The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to the software standby mode. (Initial value) Bits 6 to 4--Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the clock settling time when the chip recovers from the software standby mode by an external interrupt. During the selected time, the clock oscillator runs but clock pulses are not supplied to the CPU or the on-chip supporting modules. 240 Bit 6 STS2 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 5 STS1 0 0 1 1 -- Bit 4 STS0 0 1 0 1 -- Description Settling time = 8192 states Settling time = 16384 states Settling time = 32768 states Settling time = 65536 states Settling time = 131072 states (Initial value) When the on-chip clock generator is used, the STS bits should be set to allow a settling time of at least 10ms. Table 12-3 lists the settling times selected by these bits at several clock frequencies and indicates the recommended settings. When the chip is externally clocked, the STS bits can be set to any value. The minimum value (STS2 = STS1 = STS0 = "0") is recommended. Table 12-3. Times Set by Standby Timer Select Bits (Unit: ms) Settling time (states) 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 STS2 0 0 0 0 1 STS1 0 0 1 1 -- STS0 0 1 0 1 -- 10 0.8 1.6 3.3 6.6 13.1 System clock frequency (MHz) 8 6 4 2 1 1.0 1.3 2.0 4.1 8.2 2.0 2.7 4.1 8.2 16.4 4.1 5.5 8.2 16.4 32.8 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8 65.5 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1 0.5 16.4 32.8 65.5 131.1 262.1 Notes: 1. All times are in milliseconds. 2. Recommended values are printed in boldface. 241 12.3 Sleep Mode The sleep mode provides an effective way to conserve power while the CPU is waiting for an external interrupt or an interrupt from an on-chip supporting module. 12.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode When the SSBY bit in the system control register is cleared to "0," execution of the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from the program execution state to the sleep mode. After executing the SLEEP instruction, the CPU halts, but the contents of its internal registers remain unchanged. The on-chip supporting modules continue to operate normally. 12.3.2 Exit from Sleep Mode The chip wakes up from the sleep mode when it receives an internal or external interrupt request, or a Low input at the RES or STBY pin. (1) Wake-Up by Interrupt: An interrupt releases the sleep mode and starts the CPU's interrupthandling sequence. If an interrupt from an on-chip supporting module is disabled by the corresponding enable/disable bit in the module's control register, the interrupt cannot be requested, so it cannot wake the chip up. Similarly, the CPU cannot be awoken by an interrupt other than NMI if the I (interrupt mask) bit in the CCR (condition code register) is set when the SLEEP instruction is executed. (2) Wake-Up by RES pin: When the RES pin goes Low, the chip exits from the sleep mode to the reset state. (3) Wake-Up by STBY pin: When the STBY pin goes Low, the chip exits from the sleep mode to the hardware standby mode. 242 12.4 Software Standby Mode In the software standby mode, the system clock stops and chip functions halt, including both CPU functions and the functions of the on-chip supporting modules. Power consumption is reduced to an extremely low level. The on-chip supporting modules and their registers are reset to their initial states, but as long as a minimum necessary voltage supply is maintained (at least 2V), the contents of the CPU registers and on-chip RAM remain unchanged. 12.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode To enter the software standby mode, set the standby bit (SSBY) in the system control register (SYSCR) to "1," then execute the SLEEP instruction. 12.4.2 Exit from Software Standby Mode The chip can be brought out of the software standby mode by an input at one of six pins: NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ2, RES, or STBY. (1) Recovery by External Interrupt: When an NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2 request signal is received, the clock oscillator begins operating. After the waiting time set in the system control register (bits STS2 to STS0), clock pulses are supplied to the CPU and on-chip supporting modules. The CPU executes the interrupt-handling sequence for the requested interrupt, then returns to the instruction after the SLEEP instruction. The SSBY bit is not cleared. See section 12.2, "System Control Register: Power-Down Control Bits," for information about the STS bits. (2) Recovery by RES Pin: When the RES pin goes Low, the clock oscillator starts and clock pulses are supplied to the entire chip. Next, when the RES pin goes High, the CPU begins executing the reset sequence. The SSBY bit is cleared to "0." The RES pin must be held Low long enough for the clock to stabilize. (3) Recovery by STBY Pin: When the STBY pin goes Low, the chip exits from the software standby mode to the hardware standby mode. 243 12.4.3 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode In this example the chip enters the software standby mode when NMI goes Low and exits when NMI goes High, as shown in figure 12-1. The NMI edge bit (NMIEG) in the system control register is originally cleared to "0," selecting the falling edge. When NMI goes Low, the NMI interrupt handling routine sets NMIEG to "1," sets SSBY to "1" (selecting the rising edge), then executes the SLEEP instruction. The chip enters the software standby mode. It recovers from the software standby mode on the next rising edge of NMI. Clock generator O NMI NMIEG SSBY Settling time NMI interrupt handler NMIEG = "1" SSBY = "1" Software standby mode (power-down state) SLEEP NMI interrupt handler Figure 12-1. Software Standby Mode (when) NMI Timing 12.4.4 Application Note The I/O ports retain their current states in the software standby mode. If a port is in the High output state, the current dissipation caused by the High output current is not reduced. Figure 12-1 244 12.5 Hardware Standby Mode 12.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode Regardless of its current state, the chip enters the hardware standby mode whenever the STBY pin goes Low. The hardware standby mode reduces power consumption drastically by halting the CPU, stopping all the functions of the on-chip supporting modules, and placing I/O ports in the high-impedance state. The registers of the on-chip supporting modules are reset to their initial values. Only the onchip RAM is held unchanged, provided the minimum necessary voltage supply is maintained (at least 2V). Notes: 1. The RAME bit in the system control register should be cleared to "0" before the STBY pin goes Low, to disable the on-chip RAM during the hardware standby mode. 2. Do not change the inputs at the mode pins (MD1, MD0) during hardware standby mode. Be particularly careful not to let both mode pins go Low in hardware standby mode, since that places the chip in PROM mode and increases current dissipation. 12.5.2 Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode Recovery from the hardware standby mode requires inputs at both the STBY and RES pins. When the STBY pin goes High, the clock oscillator begins running. The RES pin should be Low at this time and should be held Low long enough for the clock to stabilize. When the RES pin changes from Low to High, the reset sequence is executed and the chip returns to the program execution state. 245 12.5.3 Timing Relationships Figure 12-2 shows the timing relationships in the hardware standby mode. In the sequence shown, first RES goes Low, then STBY goes Low, at which point the chip enters the hardware standby mode. To recover, first STBY goes High, then after the clock settling time, RES goes High. Clock pulse generator RES STBY Clock settling time Restart Figure 12-2. Hardware Standby Mode Timing Figure 12-2 246 Section 13. Clock Pulse Generator 13.1 Overview The H8/329 Series has a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) consisting of an oscillator circuit, a system (O) clock divider, and a prescaler. The prescaler generates clock signals for the on-chip supporting modules. 13.1.1 Block Diagram CPG XTAL EXTAL Oscillator circuit Divider /2 Prescaler o o/2 to o/4096 Figure 13-1. Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator 13.2 Oscillator Circuit If an external crystal is connected across the EXTAL and XTAL pins, the on-chip oscillator circuit generates a clock signal for the system clock divider. Alternatively, an external clock signal can be applied to the EXTAL pin. (1) Connecting an External Crystal x Circuit Configuration: An external crystal can be connected as in the example in figure 13-2. An AT-cut parallel resonating crystal should be used. 247 CL1 EXTAL XTAL CL2 CL1 = CL2 = 10 to 22pF Figure 13-2. Connection of Crystal Oscillator (Example) y Crystal Oscillator: Figure 15-3 shows an equivalent circuit of the external crystal. The external crystal should have the characteristics listed in table 13-1. Table 13-1. External Crystal Parameters Frequency (MHz) Rs max () C0 (pF) 2 500 4 120 8 12 60 40 7 pF max 16 30 20 20 CL L XTAL RS EXTAL C0 AT-cut parallel resonating crystal Figure 13-3. Equivalent Circuit of External Crystal z Note on Board Design: When an external crystal is connected, other signal lines should be kept away from the crystal circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 13-4. The crystal and its load capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the Figure 13-3 XTAL and EXTAL pins. 248 Not allowed Signal A Signal B H8/327 CL2 XTAL EXTAL CL1 Figure 13-4. Notes on Board Design around External Crystal (2) Input of External Clock Signal Figure x Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in 13-4examples in the figure 13-5. In example (b), the external clock should be held high during standby. EXTAL External clock input XTAL Open (a) EXTAL External clock input 74HC04 XTAL (b) Figure 13-5. External Clock Input (Example) Figure 13-5 249 y External Clock Input Frequency Duty factor Double the system clock (O) frequency 45% to 55% 13.3 System Clock Divider The system clock divider divides the crystal oscillator or external clock frequency by 2 to create the system clock (O). 250 Section 14. Electrical Specifications 14.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 14-1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 14-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Supply voltage Programming voltage Input voltage Ports 1 - 6 Port 7 Analog supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Storage temperature Symbol VCC VPP Vin Vin AVCC VAN Topr Tstg Rating -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to +13.5 -0.3 to VCC + 0.3 -0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 Regular specifications: -20 to +75 Wide-range specifications: - 40 to +85 -55 to +125 Unit V V V V V V C C C Note: Exceeding the absolute maximum ratings shown in table 14-1 can permanently destroy the chip. 14.2 Electrical Characteristics 14.2.1 DC Characteristics Table 14-2 lists the DC characteristics of the 5V versions of the H8/329 Series. Table 14-3 lists the DC characteristics of the 3V versions. Table 14-4 gives the allowable current output values of the 5V versions. Table 14-5 gives the allowable current output values of the 3V versions. 251 Table 14-2. DC Characteristics (5V Versions) Conditions: VCC = 5.0V 10%, AVCC = 5.0V 10%*, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Ta = -20 to 75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to 85C (wide-range specifications) Measurement Unit conditions Item Schmitt trigger input voltage (1) Input High voltage (2) Input High voltage Input Low voltage (3) Input Low voltage Output High voltage Output Low voltage Input leakage current Symbol P67 - P62, P60, VTP47, P44 - P40 VT+ VT+ -VTRES, STBY, NMI VIH MD1, MD0 EXTAL P77 - P70 Input pins VIH other than (1) and (2) above RES, STBY VIL MD1, MD0 Input pins VIL other than (1) and (3) above All output pins VOH All output pins VOL Ports 1 and 2 RES |Iin| STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 P77 - P70 |ITSI| -Ip Min 1.0 - Typ Max - - - V VCC x 0.7 V - V VCC + 0.3 V 0.4 - VCC - 0.7 - 2.0 2.0 - - AVCC + 0.3 V VCC + 0.3 V -0.3 -0.3 - - 0.5 0.8 V V VCC - 0.5 3.5 - - - - - - 30 - - - - - - - - - - - 0.4 1.0 10.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 250 V V V V A A A A A IOH = -200A IOH = -1.0mA IOL = 1.6mA IOL = 10.0mA Vin = 0.5V to VCC - 0.5V Vin = 0.5V to AVCC - 0.5V Vin = 0.5V to VCC - 0.5V Vin = 0V Leakage current Ports 1, 2, 3 in 3-state (off state) 4, 5, 6 Input pull-up Ports 1, 2, 3 MOS current Note: * Connect AVCC to the power supply (VCC) even when the A/D converter is not used. 252 Table 14-2. DC Characteristics (5V Versions) (cont.) Conditions: VCC = 5.0V 10%, AVCC = 5.0V 10%*1, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Ta = -20 to 75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to 85C (wide-range specifications) Measurement conditions Vin = 0V f = 1MHz Ta = 25C Item Input capacitance Current dissipation*2 RES NMI All input pins except RES and NMI Normal operation Sleep mode Symbol Cin Min - - - Typ - - - Max 60 30 15 Unit pF pF pF ICC Analog supply current RAM standby voltage Standby modes*3 During A/D conversion Waiting AICC - - - - - - - - - 2.0 12 16 20 8 10 12 0.01 0.6 0.01 - 25 30 40 15 20 25 5.0 1.5 5.0 - mA mA mA mA mA mA A mA A V f = 6MHz f = 8MHz f = 10MHz f = 6MHz f = 8MHz f = 10MHz VRAM Notes: *1 Connect AVCC to the power supply (+5V) even when the A/D converter is not used. *2 Current dissipation values assume that VIH min = VCC - 0.5V, VIL max = 0.5V, all output pins are in the no-load state, and all input pull-up transistors are off. *3 For these values it is assumed that VRAM VCC < 4.5V and VIH min = VCC x 0.9, VIL max = 0.3V. 253 Table 14-3. DC Characteristics (3V Versions) Conditions: VCC = 3.0V 10%, AVCC = 5.0V 10%*1, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Ta = -20 to 75C Measurement Max Unit conditions - V VCC x 0.7 V - V VCC + 0.3 V RES, STBY VIH MD1, MD0 EXTAL, NMI P77 - P70 Input pins other than (1) and (2) above Input Low RES, STBY VIL MD1, MD0 voltage*2 (3) Input pins other than (1) and (3) above Output High All output pins VOH voltage Output Low All output pins VOL voltage Ports 1 and 2 Input RES |Iin| leakage STBY, NMI, current MD1, MD0 P77 - P70 Item Schmitt trigger input voltage*2 (1) Input High voltage*2 (2) Symbol P67 - P62, P60, VT- P47, P44 - P40 VT+ VT+ -VT- Min VCC x 0.15 - 0.2 VCC x 0.9 Typ - - - - VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 - - AVCC + 0.3 V VCC + 0.3 V -0.3 -0.3 - - VCC x 0.1 V VCC x 0.15 V VCC - 0.4 VCC - 0.9 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.4 0.4 10.0 1.0 1.0 V V V V A A A IOH = -200A IOH = -1mA IOL = 0.8mA IOL = 1.6mA Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5V Vin = 0.5 to AVCC - 0.5V Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5V - - 1.0 A Leakage Ports 1, 2, 3 |ITSI| current in 4, 5, 6 3-state (off state) 3 - 120 A Vin = 0V Input Ports 1, 2, 3 -Ip pull-up MOS current Notes: *1 Connect AVCC to the power supply (VCC) even when the A/D converter is not used. *2 In the range 3.3V < VCC < 4.5V, for the input levels of VIH and VT, apply the higher of the values given for the 5V and 3V versions. For VIL and VT-, apply the lower of the values given for the 5V and 3V versions. 254 Table 14.3. DC Characteristics (3V Versions) (cont.) Conditions: VCC = 3.0V 10%, AVCC = 5.0V 10%*1, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Ta = -20 to 70C Measurement conditions Vin = 0V f = 1MHz Ta = 25C Item Input capacitance Current dissipation*2 RES NMI All input pins except RES and NMI Normal operation Sleep mode Symbol Cin Min - - - Typ - - - Max 60 30 15 Unit pF pF pF ICC Standby modes*3 Analog During A/D AICC supply conversion current Waiting - 0.01 5.0 A RAM backup voltage VRAM 2.0 - - V (in standby modes) Notes: *1 Connect AVCC to the power supply (+3V) even when the A/D converter is not used. *2 Current dissipation values assume that VIH min. = VCC - 0.5V, VIL max. = 0.5V, all output pins are in the no-load state, and all input pull-up transistors are off. *3 For these values it is assumed that VRAM VCC < 2.7V and VIH min = VCC x 0.9, VIL max = 0.3V. - - - - - - 4 6 3 4 0.01 0.6 - 12 - 8 5.0 1.5 mA mA mA mA A mA f = 3MHz f = 5MHz f = 3MHz f = 5MHz 255 Table 14-4. Allowable Output Current Values (5V Versions) Conditions: VCC = 5.0V 10%, AVCC = 5.0V 10%, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Ta = -20 to 75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to 85C (wide-range specifications) Item Allowable output Low current (per pin) Allowable output Low current (total) Allowable output High current (per pin) Allowable output High current (total) Symbol IOL IOL -IOH -IOH Min - - - - - - Typ - - - - - - Max 10 2.0 80 120 2.0 40 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA Ports 1 and 2 Other output pins Ports 1 and 2, total Total of all output All output pins Total of all output pins Table 14-5. Allowable Output Current Values (3V Versions) Conditions: VCC = 3.0V 10%, AVCC = 5.0V 10%, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Ta = -20 to 75C Item Allowable output Low current (per pin) Allowable output Low current (total) Allowable output High current (per pin) Allowable output High current (total) Symbol IOL IOL -IOH -IOH Min - - - - - - Typ - - - - - - Max 2 1 40 60 2 30 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA Ports 1 and 2 Other output pins Ports 1 and 2, total All output pins All output pins Total of all output pins Note: To avoid degrading the reliability of the chip, be careful not to exceed the output current values in tables 14-4 and 14-5. In particular, when driving a Darlington transistor pair or LED directly, be sure to insert a current-limiting resistor in the output path. See figures 14-1 and 14-2. 256 H8/329 Series 2 k Port Darlington pair Figure 14-1. Example of Circuit for Driving a Darlington Pair (5V Versions) H8/329 Series Vcc Fig. 14-1 600 Port 1 or 2 LED Figure 14-2. Example of Circuit for Driving an LED (5V Versions) 14.2.2 AC Characteristics The AC characteristics of the H8/329 Series are listed in three tables. Bus timing parameters are given in table 14-6, control signal timing parameters in table 14-7, and timing parameters of the onchip supporting modules in table 14-8. Fig. 14-2 257 Table 14-6. Bus Timing Condition A: VCC = 5.0V 10%, VSS = 0V, O = 0.5MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to 75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to 85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 3.0V 10%, VSS = 0V, O = 0.5MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to 75C Condition B 5MHz Item Clock cycle time Clock pulse width Low Clock pulse width High Clock rise time Clock fall time Address delay time Address hold time Address strobe delay time Write strobe delay time Strobe delay time Write strobe pulse width* Address setup time 1* Address setup time 2* Read data setup time Read data hold time Read data access time* Write data delay time Write data setup time Write data hold time Wait setup time Wait hold time Symbol tcyc tCL tCH tCr tCf tAD tAH tASD tWSD tSD tWSW tAS1 tAS2 tRDS tRDH tACC tWDD tWDS tWDH tWTS tWTH 200 70 70 - - - 30 - - - 200 25 105 90 0 - - 10 30 60 20 6MHz Min Max Min - - 25 25 90 - 80 80 90 - - - - - 300 125 - - - - 65 65 - - - 30 - - - 200 25 105 70 0 - - 20 30 40 10 Condition A 8MHz 10MHz 2000 ns - - 15 15 50 - 40 50 50 - - - - - 170 75 - - - - ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Measurement Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-4 Fig. 14-5 Fig. 14-5 Max Min - - 15 15 70 - 70 70 70 - - - - - 270 85 - - - - 45 45 - - - 25 - - - 150 20 80 50 0 - - 10 25 40 10 Max Min 2000 100 - - 15 15 60 - 60 60 60 - - - - - 210 75 - - - - 35 35 - - - 20 - - - 120 15 65 35 0 - - 5 20 40 10 Max Unit conditions 2000 166.7 2000 125 Note: * Values at maximum operating frequency 258 Table 14-7. Control Signal Timing Condition A: VCC = 5.0V 10%, VSS = 0V, O = 0.5MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to 75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to 85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 3.0V 10%, VSS = 0V, O = 0.5MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to 75C Condition B 5MHz Item RES setup time RES pulse width NMI setup time (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2) NMI hold time (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2) Interrupt pulse width for recovery from software standby mode (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2) Crystal oscillator settling time (reset) Crystal oscillator settling time (software standby) tOSC2 10 - 10 - 10 - 10 - ms Fig. 14-9 tOSC1 20 - 20 - 20 - 20 - ms Fig. 14-8 tNMIW 300 - 200 - 200 - 200 - ns Fig. 14-7 tNMIH 10 - 10 - 10 - 10 - ns Fig. 14-7 Symbol tRESS tRESW tNMIS 300 10 300 - - - 6MHz 200 10 150 - - - Min Max Min Condition A 8MHz 200 10 150 - - - 10MHz 200 10 150 - - - ns ns Measurement Fig. 14-6 Fig. 14-7 Max Min Max Min Max Unit conditions tcyc Fig. 14-6 259 Table 14-8. Timing Conditions of On-Chip Supporting Modules Condition A: VCC = 5.0V 10%, VSS = 0V, O = 0.5MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to 75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to 85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 3.0V 10%, VSS = 0V, O = 0.5MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to 75C Condition B 5MHz Item FRT Timer input setup time Timer clock input setup time Timer clock pulse width tFTCWH tFTCWL TMR Timer output delay time tTMOD Timer reset input setup time Timer clock input setup time Timer clock pulse width tTMCWH (single edge) Timer clock pulse width tTMCWL (both edges) SCI Input clock cycle time (Sync) Receive data setup time tRXS (Sync) Receive data hold time (Sync) Input clock pulse width tSCKW Ports Output data delay time Input data setup time Input data hold time tPWD tPRS tPRH 0.4 - 80 80 0.6 150 - - 0.4 - 50 50 0.6 100 - - 0.4 - 50 50 0.6 100 - - 0.4 - 50 50 0.6 100 - - tscyc Fig. 14-16 ns ns ns Fig. 14-17 Fig. 14-17 Fig. 14-17 tRXH 150 - 100 - 100 - 100 - ns Fig. 14-15 150 - 100 - 100 - 100 - ns Fig. 14-15 (Async) (Sync) tscyc tscyc tTXD 4 6 - - - 200 4 6 - - - 100 4 6 - - - 100 4 6 - - - 100 tcyc tcyc ns Fig. 14-15 Fig. 14-15 Fig. 14-15 2.5 - 2.5 - 2.5 - 2.5 - tcyc Fig. 14-13 1.5 - 1.5 - 1.5 - 1.5 - tcyc Fig. 14-13 tTMCS 80 - 50 - 50 - 50 - ns Fig. 14-13 tTMRS - 80 150 - - 50 100 - - 50 100 - - 50 100 - ns ns Fig. 14-12 Fig. 14-14 1.5 - 1.5 - 1.5 - 1.5 - tcyc Fig. 14-11 Timer output delay time tFTOD tFTIS tFTCS - 80 80 150 - - - 50 50 6MHz 100 - - - 50 50 Symbol Min Max Min Condition A 8MHz 100 - - - 50 50 10MHz 100 - - ns ns ns Measurement Fig. 14-10 Fig. 14-10 Fig. 14-11 Max Min Max Min Max Unit conditions Transmit data delay 260 * Measurement Conditions for AC Characteristics 5V RL LSI output pin RH C C = 90 pF: Ports 1 - 4, 6 30 pF: Port 5 RL = 2.4 k RH = 12 k Input/output timing reference levels Low: 0.8 V High: 2.0 V Figure 14-3. Output Load Circuit 14.2.3 A/D Converter Characteristics Table 14-9 lists the characteristics of the on-chip A/D converter. Table 14-9. A/D Converter Characteristics Fig. 14-3 Condition A: VCC = AVCC = 5.0V 10%, VSS = AVSS = 0V, O = 0.5MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to 75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to 85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 3.0V 10%, AVCC = 5.0V 10%, VSS = AVSS = 0V, O = 0.5MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to 75C Condition B 5MHz Item Resolution Conversion time (single mode)* Analog input capacitance Allowable signal source impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantizing error Absolute accuracy -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 1 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 1 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 1 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 1 1 0.5 1.5 LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB 8 -- -- -- 8 -- -- -- 8 20 10 8 -- -- 6MHz 8 -- -- -- 8 20 10 8 -- -- Condition A 8MHz 8 -- -- -- 8 20 10 8 -- -- 10MHz Unit Bits s pF k 8 -- -- -- 8 12.2 20 10 Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max 24.4 -- 20.4 -- 15.25 -- 0.5 -- 1.5 -- 0.5 -- 1.5 -- 0.5 -- 1.5 -- Note: * At maximum operating frequency. 261 14.3 MCU Operational Timing This section provides the following timing charts: 14.3.1 14.3.2 14.3.3 14.3.4 14.3.5 14.3.6 Bus Timing Control Signal Timing 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing 8-Bit Timer Timing SCI Timing I/O Port Timing Figures 14-4 to 14-5 Figures 14-6 to 14-9 Figures 14-10 to 14-11 Figures 14-12 to 14-14 Figures 14-15 to 14-16 Figure 14-17 14.3.1 Bus Timing (1) Basic Bus Cycle (without Wait States) in Expanded Modes T1 t cyc t CH O t AD t Cf t Cr tCL T2 T3 A15 to A0 t ASD t ASI AS, RD t ACC D7 to D0 (Read) t AS2 WR tWDD D7 to D0 (Write) t WDS t WDH tRDS tRDH t SD t AH t WSD tWSW t SD t AH Figure 14-4. Basic Bus Cycle (without Wait States) in Expanded Modes 262 (2) Basic Bus Cycle (with 1 Wait State) in Expanded Modes T1 O T2 TW T3 A15 to A0 AS, RD D7 to D0 (Read) WR D7 to D0 (Write) t WTS t WTH tWTS tWTH WAIT Figure 14-5. Basic Bus Cycle (with 1 Wait State) in Expanded Modes (Modes 1 and 2) 14.3.2 Control Signal Timing (1) Reset Input Timing Fig. 17-5 O tRESS RES tRESS tRESW Figure 14-6. Reset Input Timing 263 (2) Interrupt Input Timing O t NMIS NMI IRQE (Edge) t NMIH t NMIS IRQL (Level) tNMIW NMI IRQi Note: i = 0 to 2; IRQE: IRQi when edge-sensed; IRQL: IRQi when level-sensed Figure 14-7. Interrupt Input Timing Fig. 14-7 264 O VCC STBY tOSC1 tOSC1 RES Figure 14-8. Clock Setting Timing (4) Clock Settling Timing for Recovery from Software Standby Mode O NMI IRQi (i = 0, 1, 2) t OSC2 Figure 14-9. Clock Settling Timing for Recovery from Software Standby Mode 14.3.3 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing (1) Free-Running Timer Input/Output Timing Fig. 17-10 O Free-running Compare-match timer counter t FTOD FTOA , FTOB t FTIS FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID Figure 14-10. Free-Running Timer Input/Output Timing 266 (2) External Clock Input Timing for Free-Running Timer O tFTCS FTCI t FTCWL tFTCWH Figure 14-11. External Clock Input Timing for Free-Running Timer 14.3.4 8-Bit Timer Timing (1) 8-Bit Timer Output Timing O Timer Compare-match counter tTMOD TMO0, TMO1 Figure 14-12. 8-Bit Timer Output Timing (2) 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing O Fig. 16-12 tTMCS tTMCS TMCI0, TMCI1 tTMCWL tTMCWH Figure 14-13. 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing Fig. 16-13 267 (3) 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing O tTMRS TMRI0, TMRI1 Timer counter N H'00 Figure 14-14. 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing 14.3.5 Serial Communication Interface Timing (1) SCI Input/Output Timing Fig. 16-14 tScyc Serial clock (SCK) Transmit data (TxD) t TXD t RXS Receive data (RxD) t RXH Figure 14-15. SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode) Fig. 17-17 268 (2) SCI Input Clock Timing t SCKW SCK t Scyc Figure 14-16. SCI Input Clock Timing 14.3.6 I/O Port Timing T1 T2 T3 Fig. 17-18 O t PRS Port 1 to (Input) Port 7 Port 1 * to (Output) Port 6 Note: * Except P46. t PRH t PWD Figure 14-17. I/O Port Input/Output Timing Fig. 14-17 269 Appendix A. CPU Instruction Set A.1 Instruction Set List Operation Notation Rd8/16 General register (destination) (8 or 16 bits) Rs8/16 General register (source) (8 or 16 bits) Rn8/16 General register (8 or 16 bits) CCR Condition code register N N (negative) flag in CCR Z Z (zero) flag in CCR V V (overflow) flag in CCR C C (carry) flag in CCR PC Program counter SP Stack pointer #xx:3/8/16 Immediate data (3, 8, or 16 bits) d:8/16 Displacement (8 or 16 bits) @aa:8/16 Absolute address (8 or 16 bits) + Addition - Subtraction x Multiplication / Division AND logical OR logical Exclusive OR logical Move -- Not Condition Code Notation * 0 -- Modified according to the instruction result Undetermined (unpredictable) Always cleared to "0" Not affected by the instruction result 271 A.2 Operation Code Map Table A-2 is a map of the operation codes contained in the first byte of the instruction code (bits 15 to 8 of the first instruction word). Some pairs of instructions have identical first bytes. These instructions are differentiated by the first bit of the second byte (bit 7 of the first instruction word). Instruction when first bit of byte 2 (bit 7 of first instruction word) is "0." Instruction when first bit of byte 2 (bit 7 of first instruction word) is "1." 278 Table A-2. Operation Code Map HI LO 0 NOP SHLL SHAL 1 SLEEP 2 STC 3 LDC 4 ORC OR 5 XORC XOR 6 ANDC AND 7 LDC NOT NEG 8 ADD SUB 9 A INC DEC B ADDS SUBS C MOV CMP D E ADDX SUBX F DAA DAS 0 1 2 SHLR ROTXL ROTXR SHAR ROTL ROTR MOV 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F BRA*2 MULXU BSET BRN *2 DIVXU BNOT BCLR BTST BOR BIOR BHI BLS BCC *2 RTS BCS *2 BSR BNE RTE BEQ BVC BVS BPL JMP BMI BGE BLT BGT JSR BLE BST BIST BXOR BAND BLD BIXOR BIAND BILD MOV *1 MOV EEPMOV Bit manipulation instruction ADD ADDX CMP SUBX OR XOR AND MOV Notes: *1 The MOVFPE and MOVTPE instructions are identical to MOV instructions in the first byte and first bit of the second byte (bits 15 to 7 of the instruction word). The PUSH and POP instructions are identical in machine language to MOV instructions. *2 The BT, BF, BHS, and BLO instructions are identical in machine language to BRA, BRN, BCC, and BCS, respectively. A.3 Number of States Required for Execution The tables below can be used to calculate the number of states required for instruction execution. Table A-3 indicates the number of states required for each cycle (instruction fetch, branch address read, stack operation, byte data access, word data access, internal operation). Table A-4 indicates the number of cycles of each type occurring in each instruction. The total number of states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated from these two tables as follows: Execution states = I x SI + J x SJ + K x SK + L x SL + M x SM + N x SN Examples: Mode 1 (on-chip ROM disabled), stack located in external memory, 1 wait state inserted in external memory access. 1. BSET #0, @FFC7 From table A-4: I = L = 2, J = K = M = N= 0 From table A-3: SI = 8, SL = 3 Number of states required for execution: 2 x 8 + 2 x 3 =22 2. JSR @@30 From table A-4: I = 2, J = K = 1, L = M = N = 0 From table A-3: SI = SJ = SK = 8 Number of states required for execution: 2 x 8 + 1 x 8 + 1 x 8 = 32 Table A-3. Number of States Taken by Each Cycle in Instruction Execution Execution status (instruction cycle) Instruction fetch Branch address read Stack operation Byte data access Word data access Internal operation Access location On-chip reg. field External memory 6 2 3 6 1 3+m 6 + 2m 6 + 2m On-chip memory SI SJ SK SL SM SN Note: m: Number of wait states inserted in access to external device. 280 Table A-4. Number of Cycles in Each Instruction Instruction Branch fetch addr. read I J 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Stack operation K Byte data access L Word data Internal access operation M N Instruction Mnemonic ADD ADD.B #xx:8, Rd ADD.B Rs, Rd ADD.W Rs, Rd ADDS ADDX ADDS.W #1/2, Rd ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd ADDX.B Rs, Rd AND AND.B #xx:8, Rd AND.B Rs, Rd ANDC BAND ANDC #xx:8, CCR BAND #xx:3, Rd BAND #xx:3, @Rd BAND #xx:3, @aa:8 Bcc BRA d:8 (BT d:8) BRN d:8 (BF d:8) BHI d:8 BLS d:8 BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) BNE d:8 BEQ d:8 BVC d:8 BVS d:8 BPL d:8 BMI d:8 BGE d:8 BLT d:8 BGT d:8 BLE d:8 BCLR BCLR #xx:3, Rd BCLR #xx:3, @Rd BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8 BCLR Rn, Rd BCLR Rn, @Rd BCLR Rn, @aa:8 Note: All values left blank are zero. 281 Table A-4. Number of Cycles in Each Instruction (cont.) Instruction Branch fetch addr. read I J 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 Stack operation K Byte data access L Word data Internal access operation M N Instruction Mnemonic BIAND BIAND #xx:3, Rd BIAND #xx:3, @Rd BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BILD BILD #xx:3, Rd BILD #xx:3, @Rd BILD #xx:3, @aa:8 BIOR BIOR #xx:3 Rd BIOR #xx:3 @Rd BIOR #xx:3 @aa:8 BIST BIST #xx:3, Rd BIST #xx:3, @Rd BIST #xx:3, @aa:8 BIXOR BIXOR #xx:3, Rd BIXOR #xx:3, @Rd BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BLD BLD #xx:3, Rd BLD #xx:3, @Rd BLD #xx:3, @aa:8 BNOT BNOT #xx:3, Rd BNOT #xx:3, @Rd BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8 BNOT Rn, Rd BNOT Rn, @Rd BNOT Rn, @aa:8 BOR BOR #xx:3, Rd BOR #xx:3, @Rd BOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET BSET #xx:3, Rd BSET #xx:3, @Rd BSET #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET Rn, Rd BSET Rn, @Rd BSET Rn, @aa:8 Note: All values left blank are zero. 282 Table A-4. Number of Cycles in Each Instruction (cont.) Instruction Branch fetch addr. read I J 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2n+2* 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 Stack operation K 1 Byte data access L Word data Internal access operation M N Instruction Mnemonic BSR BST BSR d:8 BST #xx:3, Rd BST #xx:3, @Rd BST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST BTST #xx:3, Rd BTST #xx:3, @Rd BTST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST Rn, Rd BTST Rn, @Rd BTST Rn, @aa:8 BXOR BXOR #xx:3, Rd BXOR #xx:3, @Rd BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 CMP CMP.B #xx:8, Rd CMP.B Rs, Rd CMP.W Rs, Rd DAA DAS DEC DIVXU EEPMOV INC JMP DAA.B Rd DAS.B Rd DEC.B Rd DIVXU.B Rs, Rd EEPMOV INC.B Rd JMP @Rn JMP @aa:16 JMP @@aa:8 JSR JSR @Rn JSR @aa:16 JSR @@aa:8 LDC LDC #xx:8, CCR LDC Rs, CCR MOV MOV.B #xx:8, Rd MOV.B Rs, Rd MOV.B @Rs, Rd MOV.B @(d:16,Rs), Rd Notes: All values left blank are zero. * n: Initial value in R4L. Source and destination are accessed n + 1 times each. 283 Table A-4. Number of Cycles in Each Instruction (cont.) Instruction Branch fetch addr. read I J 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Not supported 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 Stack operation K Byte data access L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Word data Internal access operation M N 2 Instruction Mnemonic MOV MOV.B @Rs+, Rd MOV.B @aa:8, Rd MOV.B @aa:16, Rd MOV.B Rs, @Rd MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, Rd) MOV.B Rs, @-Rd MOV.B Rs, @aa:8 MOV.B Rs, @aa:16 MOV.W #xx:16, Rd MOV.W Rs, Rd MOV.W @Rs, Rd MOV.W @(d:16, Rs), Rd MOV.W @Rs+, Rd MOV.W @aa:16, Rd MOV.W Rs, @Rd MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, Rd) MOV.W Rs, @-Rd MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 MOVFPE MOVTPE MULXU NEG NOP NOT OR MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd MOVTPE.Rs, @aa:16 MULXU.Rs, Rd NEG.B Rd NOP NOT.B Rd OR.B #xx:8, Rd OR.B Rs, Rd ORC POP PUSH ROTL ROTR ROTXL ROTXR ORC #xx:8, CCR POP Rd PUSH Rd ROTL.B Rd ROTR.B Rd ROTXL.B Rd ROTXR.B Rd 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 2 2 Note: All values left blank are zero. 284 Table A-4. Number of Cycles in Each Instruction (cont.) Instruction Branch fetch addr. read I J 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Stack operation K 2 1 Byte data access L Word data Internal access operation M N 2 2 Instruction Mnemonic RTE RTS SHAL SHAR SHLL SHLR SLEEP STC SUB RTE RTS SHAL.B Rd SHAR.B Rd SHLL.B Rd SHLR.B Rd SLEEP STC CCR, Rd SUB.B Rs, Rd SUB.W Rs, Rd SUBS SUBX SUBS.W #1/2, Rd SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd SUBX.B Rs, Rd XOR XOR.B #xx:8, Rd XOR.B Rs, Rd XORC XORC #xx:8, CCR Note: All values left blank are zero. 285 Appendix B. Register Field B.1 Register Addresses and Bit Names Addr. (last Register byte) name Bit 7 H'80 H'81 H'82 H'83 H'84 H'85 H'86 H'87 H'88 H'89 H'8A H'8B H'8C H'8D H'8E H'8F H'90 H'91 H'92 H'93 H'94 H'95 H'96 H'97 H'98 H'99 H'9A H'9B H'9C H'9D H'9E H'9F -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TIER TCSR FRC (H) FRC (L) OCRA (H) OCRB (H) OCRA (L) OCRB (L) TCR TOCR ICRA (H) ICRA (L) ICRB (H) ICRB (L) ICRC (H) ICRC (L) ICRD (H) ICRD (L) IEDGA -- IEDGB -- IEDGC -- IEDGD OCRS BUFEA OEA BUFEB CKS1 OEB CKS0 OLVLA OLVLB -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ICIAE ICFA -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ICIBE ICFB -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ICICE ICFC -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ICIDE ICFD -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- OCIAE OCFA -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- OCFB -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- OVF -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CCLRA FRT -- Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit names Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module External addresses (in expanded modes) OCIBE OVIE (Continued on next page) Notes: FRT: Free-Running Timer 286 (Continued from previous page) Addr. (last Register byte) name Bit 7 H'A0 H'A1 H'A2 H'A3 H'A4 H'A5 H'A6 H'A7 H'A8 H'A9 H'AA H'AB H'AC H'AD H'AE H'AF H'B0 H'B1 H'B2 H'B3 H'B4 H'B5 H'B6 H'B7 H'B8 H'B9 H'BA H'BB H'BC H'BD H'BE H'BF -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P1PCR P2PCR P3PCR -- P1DDR P2DDR P1DR P2DR P3DDR P4DDR P3DR P4DR P5DDR P6DDR P5DR P6DR -- -- P7DR -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P17PCR P27PCR P37PCR -- Bit 6 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit names Bit 4 Bit 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P13PCR P23PCR P33PCR -- Bit 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Module P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR -- -- -- P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR -- -- -- Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 -- Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port 5 Port 6 -- -- Port 7 -- P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P17 P27 P16 P26 P15 P25 P14 P24 P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR P13 P23 P12 P22 P11 P21 P10 P20 P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P37 P47 -- -- P67 -- -- P77 -- P36 P46 -- -- P66 -- -- P76 -- P35 P45 -- -- P65 -- -- P75 -- P34 P44 -- -- P64 -- -- P74 -- P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR P33 P43 -- -- P63 -- -- P73 -- P32 P42 P31 P41 P30 P40 P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR P52 P62 -- -- P72 -- P51 P61 -- -- P71 -- P50 P60 -- -- P70 -- P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR (Continued on next page) 287 (Continued from preceding page) Addr. (last Register byte) name Bit 7 H'C0 H'C1 H'C2 H'C3 H'C4 H'C5 H'C6 H'C7 H'C8 H'C9 H'CA H'CB H'CC H'CD H'CE H'CF H'D0 H'D1 H'D2 H'D3 H'D4 H'D5 H'D6 H'D7 H'D8 H'D9 H'DA H'DB H'DC H'DD H'DE H'DF -- -- -- STCR SYSCR MDCR ISCR IER TCR TCSR TCORA TCORB TCNT -- -- -- TCR TCSR TCORA TCORB TCNT -- -- -- SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0 -- -- -- C/A -- -- -- CHR -- -- -- PE -- -- -- O/E -- -- -- STOP -- -- -- MP -- -- -- CKS1 -- -- -- CKS0 SCI -- -- -- CMIEB CMFB -- -- -- CMIEA CMFA -- -- -- OVIE OVF -- -- -- CCLR1 -- -- -- -- CCLR0 OS3 -- -- -- CKS2 OS2 -- -- -- CKS1 OS1 -- -- -- CKS0 OS0 TMR1 -- -- -- -- SSBY -- -- -- CMIEB CMFB Bit 6 -- -- -- -- STS2 -- -- -- CMIEA CMFA Bit 5 -- -- -- -- STS1 -- -- -- OVIE OVF Bit names Bit 4 Bit 3 -- -- -- -- STS0 -- -- -- CCLR1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CCLR0 OS3 Bit 2 -- -- -- MPE -- Bit 1 -- -- -- ICKS1 MDS1 Bit 0 -- -- -- ICKS0 RAME MDS0 IRQ0E CKS0 OS0 Module -- -- -- NMIEG -- IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC IRQ2E IRQ1E CKS2 OS2 CKS1 OS1 TMR0 (Continued on next page) Notes: TMR0: 8-Bit Timer channel 0 TMR1: 8-Bit Timer channel 1 SCI: Serial Communication Interface 288 (Continued from preceding page) Addr. (last Register byte) name Bit 7 H'E0 H'E1 H'E2 H'E3 H'E4 H'E5 H'E6 H'E7 H'E8 H'E9 H'EA H'EB H'EC H'ED H'EE H'EF H'F0 H'F1 H'F2 H'F3 H'F4 H'F5 H'F6 H'F7 H'F8 H'F9 H'FA H'FB H'FC H'FD H'FE H'FF ADDRA -- ADDRB -- ADDRC -- ADDRD -- -- -- ADIE -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ADST -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SCAN -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CKS -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CH2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CH1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CH0 -- CHS -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit names Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module A/D ADCSR ADF -- ADCR -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TRGE -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Note: A/D: Analog-to-Digital converter 289 B.2 Register Descriptions Register name Abbreviation of register name TIER--Timer Interrupt Enable Register Bit No. Initial value Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ICIAE 0 R/W 6 ICIBE 0 R/W 5 ICICE 0 R/W 4 ICIDE 0 R/W H'FF90 3 2 OCIAE OCIBE 0 0 R/W R/W 1 OVIE 0 R/W Address onto which register is mapped FRT 0 -- 1 -- Name of on-chip supporting module Bit names (abbreviations). Bits marked "--" are reserved. Overflow Interrupt Enable Type of access permitted R Read only W Write only R/W Read or write 0 1 0 1 Overflow interrupt request is disabled. Overflow interrupt request is enabled. Output Compare Interrupt B Enable Output compare interrupt request B is disabled. Output compare interrupt request B is enabled. Full name of bit Output Compare Interrupt A Enable 0 1 Output compare interrupt request A is disabled. Output compare interrupt request A is enabled. Description of bit function Input Capture Interrupt D Enable 0 1 Input capture interrupt request D is disabled. Input capture interrupt request D is enabled. H161 H8/337 H.M '91 B.2 Register Description 290 TIER--Timer Interrupt Enable Register 7 ICIAE Initial value 0 Read/Write R/W Bit 6 ICIBE 0 R/W 5 ICICE 0 R/W H'FF90 4 3 2 ICIDE OCIAE OCIBE 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W 1 OVIE 0 R/W FRT 0 -- 1 -- Overflow Interrupt Enable 0 Overflow interrupt request is disabled. 1 Overflow interrupt request is enabled. Output Compare Interrupt B Enable 0 Output compare interrupt request B is disabled. 1 Output compare interrupt request B is enabled. Output Compare Interrupt A Enable 0 Output compare interrupt request A is disabled. 1 Output compare interrupt request A is enabled. Input Capture Interrupt D Enable 0 Input capture interrupt request D is disabled. 1 Input capture interrupt request D is enabled. Input Capture Interrupt C Enable 0 Input capture interrupt request C is disabled. 1 Input capture interrupt request C is enabled. Input Capture Interrupt B Enable 0 Input capture interrupt request B is disabled. 1 Input capture interrupt request B is enabled. Input Capture Interrupt A Enable 0 Input capture interrupt request A is disabled. 1 Input capture interrupt request A is enabled. 291 TCSR--Timer Control/Status Register Bit 7 6 ICFA ICFB Initial value 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* 5 ICFC 0 R/(W)* H'FF91 FRT 4 3 2 1 0 ICFD OCFA OCFB OVF CCLRA 0 0 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/W Counter Clear A 0 FRC count is not cleared. 1 FRC count is cleared by compare-match A. Timer Overflow Flag 0 Cleared when CPU reads OVF = "1," then writes "0" in OVF. 1 Set when FRC changes from H'FFFF to H'0000. Output Compare Flag B 0 Cleared when CPU reads OCFB = "1", then writes "0" in OCFB. 1 Set when FRC = OCRB. Output Compare Flag A 0 Cleared when CPU reads OCFA = "1", then writes "0" in OCFA. 1 Set when FRC = OCRA. Input Capture Flag D 0 Cleared when CPU reads ICFD = "1", then writes "0" in ICFD. 1 Set by FTID input. Input Capture Flag C 0 Cleared when CPU reads ICFC = "1", then writes "0" in ICFC. 1 Set by FTIC input. Input Capture Flag B 0 Cleared when CPU reads ICFB = "1", then writes "0" in ICFB. 1 Set when FTIB input causes FRC to be copied to ICRB. Input Capture Flag A 0 Cleared when CPU reads ICFA = "1", then writes "0" in ICFA. 1 Set when FTIA input causes FRC to be copied to ICRA. Note: * Software can write a "0" in bits 7 to 1 to clear the flags, but cannot write a "1" in these bits. 292 FRC (H and L)--Free-Running Counter Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 H'FF92, H'FF93 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W FRT 0 0 R/W 0 R/W Count value OCRA (H and L)--Output Compare Register A Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 H'FF94, H'FF95 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W FRT 0 1 R/W 1 R/W Continually compared with FRC. OCFA is set to "1" when OCRA = FRC. OCRB (H and L)--Output Compare Register B Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 H'FF94, H'FF95 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W FRT 0 1 R/W 1 R/W Continually compared with FRC. OCFB is set to "1" when OCRB = FRC. 293 TCR--Timer Control Register 7 6 IEDGA IEDGB Initial value 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W Bit 5 IEDGC 0 R/W H'FF96 4 3 2 IEDGD BUFEA BUFEB 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W FRT 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock Select 0 0 Internal clock source: O/2 0 1 Internal clock source: O/8 1 0 Internal clock source: O/32 1 1 External clock source: counted on rising edge Buffer Enable B 0 ICRD is used for input capture D. 1 ICRD is buffer register for input capture B. Buffer Enable A 0 ICRC is used for input capture C. 1 ICRC is buffer register for input capture A. Input Edge Select D 0 Falling edge of FTID is valid. 1 Rising edge of FTID is valid. Input Edge Select C 0 Falling edge of FTIC is valid. 1 Rising edge of FTIC is valid. Input Edge Select B 0 Falling edge of FTIB is valid. 1 Rising edge of FTIB is valid. Input Edge Select A 0 Falling edge of FTIA is valid. 1 Rising edge of FTIA is valid. 294 TOCR--Timer Output Compare Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 OCRS 0 R/W H'FF97 3 OEA 0 R/W 2 OEB 0 R/W FRT 1 0 OLVLA OLVLB 0 0 R/W R/W Output Level B 0 Compare-match B causes "0" output. 1 Compare-match B causes "1" output. Output Level A 0 Compare-match A causes "0" output. 1 Compare-match A causes "1" output. Output Enable B 0 Output compare B output is disabled. 1 Output compare B output is enabled. Output Enable A 0 Output compare A output is disabled. 1 Output compare A output is enabled. Output Compare Register Select 0 The CPU can access OCRA. 1 The CPU can access OCRB. ICRA (H and L)--Input Capture Register A Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R H'FF98, H'FF99 2 0 R 1 0 R FRT 0 0 R Contains FRC count captured on FTIA input. 295 ICRB (H and L)--Input Capture Register B Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R H'FF9A, H'FF9B 2 0 R 1 0 R FRT 0 0 R Contains FRC count captured on FTIB input. ICRC (H and L)--Input Capture Register C Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R H'FF9C, H'FF9D 2 0 R 1 0 R FRT 0 0 R Contains FRC count captured on FTIC input, or old ICRA value in buffer mode. ICRD (H and L)--Input Capture Register D Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R H'FF9E, H'FF9F 2 0 R 1 0 R FRT 0 0 R Contains FRC count captured on FTID input, or old ICRB value in buffer mode. 296 P1PCR--Port 1 Input Pull-Up Control Register Bit H'FFAC Port 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17PCR P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P13PCR P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Port 1 Input Pull-Up Control 0 Input pull-up transistor is off. 1 Input pull-up transistor is on. P2PCR--Port 2 Input Pull-Up Control Register Bit H'FFAD Port 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Port 2 Input Pull-Up Control 0 Input pull-up transistor is off. 1 Input pull-up transistor is on. P3PCR--Port 3 Input Pull-Up Control Register Bit H'FFAE Port 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR P33PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Port 3 Input Pull-Up Control 0 Input pull-up transistor is off. 1 Input pull-up transistor is on. 297 P1DDR--Port 1 Data Direction Register Bit Mode 1 Initial value Read/Write Modes 2 and 3 Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFB0 2 1 Port 1 0 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W Port 1 Input/Output Control 0 Input port 1 Output port P1DR--Port 1 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P17 0 R/W 6 P16 0 R/W 5 P15 0 R/W 4 P14 0 R/W H'FFB2 3 P13 0 R/W 2 P12 0 R/W 1 P11 0 R/W Port 1 0 P10 0 R/W 298 P2DDR--Port 2 Data Direction Register Bit Mode 1 Initial value Read/Write Modes 2 and 3 Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFB1 2 1 Port 2 0 P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W Port 2 Input/Output Control 0 Input port 1 Output port P2DR--Port 2 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P27 0 R/W 6 P26 0 R/W 5 P25 0 R/W 4 P24 0 R/W H'FFB3 3 P23 0 R/W 2 P22 0 R/W 1 P21 0 R/W Port 2 0 P20 0 R/W P3DDR--Port 3 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W H'FFB4 2 0 W 1 0 W Port 3 0 0 W P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Port 3 Input/Output Control 0 Input port 1 Output port 299 P3DR--Port 3 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P37 0 R/W 6 P36 0 R/W 5 P35 0 R/W 4 P34 0 R/W H'FFB6 3 P33 0 R/W 2 P32 0 R/W 1 P31 0 R/W Port 3 0 P30 0 R/W P4DDR--Port 4 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W H'FFB5 2 0 W 1 0 W Port 4 0 0 W P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR Port 4 Input/Output Control 0 Input port 1 Output port P4DR--Port 4 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P47 0 R/W 6 P46 * R/W 5 P45 0 R/W 4 P44 0 R/W 3 H'FFB7 2 P42 0 R/W 1 P41 0 R/W Port 4 0 P40 0 R/W P43 0 R/W Note: * Determined by the level at pin P46. P5DDR--Port 5 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- H'FFB8 4 -- Port 5 1 0 W 0 0 W 6 -- 5 -- 3 -- 2 0 W P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- Port 5 Input/Output Control 0 Input port 1 Output port 300 P5DR--Port 5 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'FFBA 2 P52 0 R/W 1 P51 0 R/W Port 5 0 P50 0 R/W P6DDR--Port 6 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W H'FFB9 2 0 W 1 0 W Port 6 0 0 W P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR Port 6 Input/Output Control 0 Input port 1 Output port P6DR--Port 6 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P67 0 R/W 6 P66 0 R/W 5 P65 0 R/W 4 P64 0 R/W H'FFBB 3 P63 0 R/W 2 P62 0 R/W 1 P61 0 R/W Port 6 0 P60 0 R/W P7DR--Port 7 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P77 * R 6 P76 * R 5 P75 * R 4 P74 * R 3 P73 * R H'FFBE 2 P72 * R 1 P71 * R Port 7 0 P70 * R Note: * Depends on the levels of pins P77 to P70. 301 STCR--Serial/Timer Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'FFC3 2 MPE 0 R/W 1 ICKS1 0 R/W TMR0/1 0 ICKS0 0 R/W Multiprocessor Enable 0 Multiprocessor communication function is disabled. 1 Multiprocessor communication function is enabled. Internal Clock Source Select See TCR under TMR0 and TMR1. SYSCR--System Control Register Bit 7 SSBY Initial value 0 Read/Write R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- H'FFC4 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 -- 1 -- System Control 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM Enable 0 On-chip RAM is disabled. 1 On-chip RAM is enabled. NMI Edge 0 Falling edge of NMI is detected. 1 Rising edge of NMI is detected. Standby Timer Select 0 0 0 Clock settling time = 8192 states 0 0 1 Clock settling time = 16384 states 0 1 0 Clock settling time = 32768 states 0 1 1 Clock settling time = 65536 states 1 - - Clock settling time = 131072 states Software Standby 0 SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode. 1 SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode. 302 MDCR--Mode Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 0 -- H'FFC5 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 1 -- System Control 1 MDS1 * R 0 MDS0 * R Mode Select Bits Value at mode pins. Note: * Determined by inputs at pins MD1 and MD0. ISCR--IRQ Sense Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- H'FFC6 3 -- 1 -- System Control 2 1 0 IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W IRQ0 to IRQ2 Sense Control 0 IRQi is level-sensed (active Low). 1 IRQi is edge-sensed (falling edge). IER--IRQ Enable Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- H'FFC7 3 -- 1 -- 2 IRQ2E 0 R/W System Control 1 IRQ1E 0 R/W 0 IRQ0E 0 R/W IRQ0 to IRQ2 Enable 0 IRQi is disabled. 1 IRQi is enabled. 303 TCR--Timer Control Register 7 6 CMIEB CMIEA Initial value 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W Bit 5 OVIE 0 R/W H'FFC8 4 3 CCLR1 CCLR0 0 0 R/W R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W TMR0 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock Select TCR CKS2 CKS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 STCR CKS0 ICKS1 ICKS0 0 -- -- 1 -- 0 1 -- 1 0 -- 0 0 -- 1 1 -- 0 1 -- 1 0 -- -- 1 -- -- 0 -- -- 1 -- -- Description Timer stopped O/8 internal clock, falling edge O/2 internal clock, falling edge O/64 internal clock, falling edge O/32 internal clock, falling edge O/1024 internal clock, falling edge O/256 internal clock, falling edge Timer stopped External clock, rising edge External clock, falling edge External clock, rising and falling edges Counter Clear 0 0 Counter is not cleared. 0 1 Cleared by compare-match A. 1 0 Cleared by compare-match B. 1 1 Cleared on rising edge of external reset input. Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable 0 Overflow interrupt request is disabled. 1 Overflow interrupt request is enabled. Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A 0 Compare-match A interrupt request is disabled. 1 Compare-match A interrupt request is enabled. Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B 0 Compare-match B interrupt request is disabled. 1 Compare-match B interrupt request is enabled. 304 TCSR--Timer Control/Status Register 7 6 5 CMFB CMFA OVF Initial value 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1 Bit 4 -- 1 -- H'FFC9 3 OS3*2 0 R/W 2 OS2*2 0 R/W 1 OS1*2 0 R/W TMR0 0 OS0*2 0 R/W Output Select 0 0 No change on compare-match A. 0 1 Output "0" on compare-match A. 1 0 Output "1" on compare-match A. 1 1 Invert (toggle) output on compare-match A. Output Select 0 0 No change on compare-match B. 0 1 Output "0" on compare-match B. 1 0 Output "1" on compare-match B. 1 1 Invert (toggle) output on compare-match B. Timer Overflow Flag 0 Cleared when CPU reads OVF = "1," then writes "0" in OVF. 1 Set when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00. Compare-Match Flag A 0 Cleared when CPU reads CMFA = "1," then writes "0" in CMFA. 1 Set when TCNT = TCORA. Compare-Match Flag B 0 Cleared from when CPU reads CMFB = "1," then writes "0" in CMFB. 1 Set when TCNT = TCORB. Notes: *1 Software can write a "0" in bits 7 to 5 to clear the flags, but cannot write a "1" in these bits. *2 When all four bits (OS3 to OS0) are cleared to "0," output is disabled. 305 TCORA--Time Constant Register A Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 H'FFCA 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W TMR0 0 1 R/W 1 R/W The CMFA bit is set to "1" when TCORA = TCNT. TCORB--Time Constant Register B Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 H'FFCB 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W TMR0 0 1 R/W 1 R/W The CMFB bit is set to "1" when TCORB = TCNT. TCNT--Timer Counter Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 H'FFCC 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W TMR0 0 0 R/W 0 R/W Count value 306 TCR--Timer Conrol Register 7 6 CMIEB CMIEA Initial value 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W Bit 5 OVIE 0 R/W H'FFD0 4 3 CCLR1 CCLR0 0 0 R/W R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W TMR1 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock Select TCR CKS2 CKS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 STCR CKS0 ICKS1 ICKS0 0 -- -- 1 0 -- 1 1 -- 0 0 -- 0 1 -- 1 0 -- 1 1 -- 0 -- -- 1 -- -- 0 -- -- 1 -- -- Description Timer stopped O/8 internal clock, falling edge O/2 internal clock, falling edge O/64 internal clock, falling edge O/128 internal clock, falling edge O/1024 internal clock, falling edge O/2048 internal clock, falling edge Timer stopped External clock, rising edge External clock, falling edge External clock, rising and falling edges Counter Clear 0 0 Counter is not cleared. 0 1 Cleared by compare-match A. 1 0 Cleared by compare-match B. 1 1 Cleared on rising edge of external reset input. Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable 0 Overflow interrupt request is disabled. 1 Overflow interrupt request is enabled. Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A 0 Compare-match A interrupt request is disabled. 1 Compare-match A interrupt request is enabled. Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B 0 Compare-match B interrupt request is disabled. 1 Compare-match B interrupt request is enabled. 307 TCSR--Timer Control/Status Register 7 6 5 CMFB CMFA OVF Initial value 0 0 0 *1 R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1 Read/Write R/(W) Bit 4 -- 1 -- H'FFD1 3 OS3*2 0 R/W 2 OS2*2 0 R/W 1 OS1*2 0 R/W TMR1 0 OS0*2 0 R/W Notes: Bit functions are the same as for TMR0. *1 Software can write a "0" in bits 7 to 5 to clear the flags, but cannot write a "1" in these bits. *2 When all four bits (OS3 to OS0) are cleared to "0," output is disabled. TCORA--Time Constant Register A Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 H'FFD2 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W TMR1 0 1 R/W 1 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for TMR0. TCORB--Time Constant Register B Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 H'FFD3 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W TMR1 0 1 R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for TMR0. TCNT--Timer Counter Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 H'FFD4 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W TMR1 0 0 R/W 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for TMR0. 308 SMR--Serial Mode Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 C/A 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W H'FFD8 3 STOP 0 R/W 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W SCI 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock Select 0 0 O clock 0 1 O/4 clock 1 0 O/16 clock 1 1 O/64 clock Multiprocessor Mode 0 Multiprocessor function disabled 1 Multiprocessor format selected Stop Bit Length 0 One stop bit 1 Two stop bits Parity Mode 0 Even parity 1 Odd parity Parity Enable 0 Transmit: No parity bit added. Receive: Parity bit not checked. 1 Transmit: Parity bit added. Receive: Parity bit checked. Character Length 0 8-Bit data length 1 7-Bit data length Communication Mode 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous 309 BRR--Bit Rate Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 H'FFD9 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W SCI 0 1 R/W 1 R/W Constant that determines the bit rate 310 SCR--Serial Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TIE 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W H'FFDA 3 MPIE 0 R/W 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W SCI 0 CKE0 0 R/W Clock Enable 0 0 Serial clock not output 1 Serial clock output at SCK pin Clock Enable 1 0 Internal clock 1 External clock Transmit End Interrupt Enable 0 TSR-empty interrupt request is disabled. 1 TSR-empty interrupt request is enabled. Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable 0 Multiprocessor receive interrupt function is disabled. 1 Multiprocessor receive interrupt function is enabled. Receive Enable 0 Receive disabled 1 Receive enabled Transmit Enable 0 Transmit disabled 1 Transmit enabled Receive Interrupt Enable 0 Receive interrupt and receive error interrupt requests are disabled. 1 Receive interrupt and receive error interrupt requests are enabled. Transmit Interrupt Enable 0 TDR-empty interrupt request is disabled. 1 TDR-empty interrupt request is enabled. 311 TDR--Transmit Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 H'FFDB 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W SCI 0 1 R/W 1 R/W Transmit data 312 SSR--Serial Status Register 7 6 TDRE RDRF Initial value 1 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* Bit H'FFDC 5 4 3 ORER FER PER 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* 2 TEND 0 R 1 MPB 0 R SCI 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor Bit Transfer 0 Multiprocessor bit = "0" in transmit data. 1 Multiprocessor bit = "1" in transmit data. Multiprocessor Bit 0 Multiprocessor bit = "0" in receive data. 1 Multiprocessor bit = "1" in receive data. Transmit End 0 Cleared when CPU reads TDRE = "1," then writes "0" in TDRE. 1 Set to "1" when TE = "0," or when TDRE = "1" at the end of character transmission. Parity Error 0 Cleared when CPU reads PER = "1," then writes "0" in PER. 1 Set when a parity error occurs (parity of receive data does not match parity selected by O/E bit in SMR). Framing Error 0 Cleared when CPU reads FER = "1," then writes "0" in FER. 1 Set when a framing error occurs (stop bit is "0"). Overrun Error 0 Cleared when CPU reads ORER = "1," then writes "0" in ORER. 1 Set when an overrun error occurs (next data is completely received while RDRF bit is set to "1"). Receive Data Register Full 0 Cleared when CPU reads RDRF = "1," then writes "0" in RDRF. 1 Set when one character is received normally and transferred from RSR to RDR. Transmit Data Register Empty 0 Cleared when CPU reads TDRE = "1," then writes "0" in TDRE 1 Set when: 1. Data is transferred from TDR to TSR. 2. TE is cleared while TDRE = "0." Note: * Software can write a "0" in bits 7 to 3 to clear the flags, but cannot write a "1" in these bits. 313 RDR--Receive Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R H'FFDD 2 0 R 1 0 R SCI 0 0 R Receive data ADDRn--A/D Data Register n (n = A, B, C, D) H'FFE0, H'FFE2, H'FFE4, H'FFE6 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R A/D 0 0 R A/D conversion result 314 ADCSR--A/D Control/Status Register Bit 7 ADF Initial value 0 Read/Write R/(W)* 6 ADIE 0 R/W 5 ADST 0 R/W 4 SCAN 0 R/W H'FFE8 3 CKS 0 R/W 2 CH2 0 R/W 1 CH1 0 R/W A/D 0 CH0 0 R/W Channel Select CH2 CH1 CH0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Single mode AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 Scan mode AN0 AN0, AN1 AN0 to AN2 AN0 to AN3 AN4 AN4, AN5 AN4 to AN6 AN4 to AN7 Clock Select 0 Conversion time = 242 states (max) 1 Conversion time = 122 states (max) Scan Mode 0 Single mode 1 Scan mode A/D Start 0 A/D conversion is halted. 1 1. Single mode: One A/D conversion is performed, then this bit is automatically cleared to "0." 2. Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues cyclically on all selected channels until "0" is written in this bit. A/D Interrupt Enable 0 The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is disabled. 1 The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is enabled. A/D End Flag 0 Cleared from "1" to "0" when CPU reads ADF = "1," then writes "0" in ADF. 1 Set to "1" at the following times: 1. Single mode: at the completion of A/D conversion 2. Scan mode: when all selected channels have been converted. Note: * Software can write a "0" in bit 7 to clear the flag, but cannot write a "1" in this bit. 315 ADCR--A/D Control Register 7 TRGE Initial value 0 Read/Write R/W Bit 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'FFEA 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- A/D 0 CHS 0 R/W Channel Select Reserved bit. Trigger Enable 0 ADTRG is disabled. 1 ADTRG is enabled. A/D conversion can be started by external trigger, or by software. 316 Appendix C. Pin States C.1 Pin States in Each Mode Table C-1. Pin States Pin name P17 - P10 A7 - A0 MCU mode 1 2 Hardware standby 3-State Software standby Low Low if DDR = 1, Prev. state if DDR = 0 Prev. state Low Low if DDR = 1, Prev. state if DDR = 0 Prev. state 3-State Prev. state 3-State Prev. state High High if DDR = 1, 3-state if DDR = 0 Sleep mode Prev. state (Addr. output pins: last address accessed) Prev. state (Addr. output pins: last address accessed) 3-State Prev. state 3-State Prev. state Clock output Clock output if DDR = 1, 3-state if DDR = 0 Normal operation A7 - A0 Addr. output or input port Reset Low 3-State P27 - P20 A15 - A8 3 1 2 Low 3-State 3-State I/O port A15-A8 output Addr. output or input port P37 - P30 D7 - D0 P47/WAIT P46/O 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 3-State 3-State I/O port D7 - D0 I/O port WAIT I/O port Clock output Clock output if DDR = 1, input port if DDR = 0 3-State 3-State Clock output 3-State 3-State Notes: 1. 3-State: High-impedance state 2. Prev. state: Previous state. Input ports are in the high-impedance state (with the MOS pull-up on if PCR = 1). Output ports hold their previous output level. 3. I/O port: Direction depends on the data direction (DDR) bit. Note that these pins may also be used by the on-chip supporting modules. See section 5, "I/O Ports," for further information. 317 Table C-1. Pin States (cont.) Pin name P45 - P43, AS, WR, RD P42 - P40 MCU mode 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Hardware standby 3-State Software standby High Prev. state Prev. state Sleep mode High Prev. state Prev. state Normal operation AS, WR, RD I/O port I/O port Reset High 3-State 3-State 3-State P52 - P50 3-State 3-State Prev. state* Prev. state I/O port P67 - P60 3-State 3-State Prev. state* Prev. state I/O port P77 - P70 3-State 3-State 3-State 3-State Input port Notes: 1. 3-State: High-impedance state 2. Prev. state: Previous state. Input ports are in the high-impedance state (with the MOS pull-up on if PCR = 1). Output ports hold their previous output level. 3. I/O port: Direction depends on the data direction (DDR) bit. Note that these pins may also be used by the on-chip supporting modules. See section 5, "I/O Ports," for further information. * On-chip supporting modules are initialized, so these pins revert to I/O ports according to the DDR and DR bits. 318 Appendix D. Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode (1) To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit cleared to "0" in SYSCR, drive the RES signal low 10 system clock cycles before the STBY signal goes low, as shown below. RES must remain low until STBY goes low (minimum delay from STBY low to RES high: 0 ns). STBY t 1 10 t cyc RES t 2 0 ns (2) When the RAME bit in SYSCR is set to "1" or it is not necessary to retain RAM contents, RES does not have to be driven low as in (1). Timing of Recovery From Hardware Standby Mode: Drive the RES signal low approximately 100 ns before STBY goes high. STBY t 100 ns t OSC RES 319 Appendix E. Package Dimensions Figure E-1 shows the dimensions of the DC-64S package. Figure E-2 shows the dimensions of the DP-64S package. Figure E-3 shows the dimensions of the FP-64A package. Figure E-4 shows the dimensions of the CP-68 package. Unit: mm 57.30 64 33 18.92 2.54 Min 5.60 Max 1 0.9 32 19.05 0.51 Min 1.778 0.250 0.48 0.10 0.11 0.25 + 0.05 - Figure E-1. Package Dimensions (DC-64S) Unit: mm 64 57.6 58.50 Max 33 17.0 18.6 Max 1 1.0 32 2.54 Min 5.08 Max 19.05 0.51 Min 0.25 - 0.05 0 - 15 + 0.11 1.78 0.25 0.48 0.10 Figure E-2. Package Dimensions (DP-64S) 320 Unit: mm 17.2 0.3 14 48 49 17.2 0.3 33 32 0.80 64 1 0.35 0.10 17 16 3.05 Max +0.20 -0.16 0.15 M +0.08 -0.05 2.70 1.6 0-5 0.1 0.17 0.1 0.8 - 0.3 Figure E-3. Package Dimensions (FP-64A) Unit: mm 25.15 0.12 24.20 60 61 44 43 25.15 0.12 68 1 4.40 0.20 9 10 0.75 26 27 0.42 0.10 1.27 2.55 0.15 23.12 0.50 0.10 23.12 0.50 Figure E-4. Package Dimensions (CP-68) 321 |
Price & Availability of HD6473278
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |